blob: fc57f6b82fc59e4dc6ae72b802856ab80e0af6e9 [file] [log] [blame]
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001/*
Johannes Berg3017b802007-08-28 17:01:53 -04002 * mac80211 <-> driver interface
3 *
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004 * Copyright 2002-2005, Devicescape Software, Inc.
5 * Copyright 2006-2007 Jiri Benc <jbenc@suse.cz>
Jouni Malinen026331c2010-02-15 12:53:10 +02006 * Copyright 2007-2010 Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net>
Johannes Bergd98ad832014-09-03 15:24:57 +03007 * Copyright 2013-2014 Intel Mobile Communications GmbH
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07008 *
9 * This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
10 * it under the terms of the GNU General Public License version 2 as
11 * published by the Free Software Foundation.
12 */
13
14#ifndef MAC80211_H
15#define MAC80211_H
16
Paul Gortmaker187f1882011-11-23 20:12:59 -050017#include <linux/bug.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070018#include <linux/kernel.h>
19#include <linux/if_ether.h>
20#include <linux/skbuff.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070021#include <linux/ieee80211.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070022#include <net/cfg80211.h>
Johannes Berg42d98792011-07-07 18:58:01 +020023#include <asm/unaligned.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070024
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040025/**
26 * DOC: Introduction
27 *
28 * mac80211 is the Linux stack for 802.11 hardware that implements
29 * only partial functionality in hard- or firmware. This document
30 * defines the interface between mac80211 and low-level hardware
31 * drivers.
32 */
33
34/**
35 * DOC: Calling mac80211 from interrupts
36 *
37 * Only ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() can be
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070038 * called in hardware interrupt context. The low-level driver must not call any
39 * other functions in hardware interrupt context. If there is a need for such
40 * call, the low-level driver should first ACK the interrupt and perform the
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +010041 * IEEE 802.11 code call after this, e.g. from a scheduled workqueue or even
42 * tasklet function.
43 *
44 * NOTE: If the driver opts to use the _irqsafe() functions, it may not also
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -070045 * use the non-IRQ-safe functions!
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070046 */
47
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040048/**
49 * DOC: Warning
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070050 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040051 * If you're reading this document and not the header file itself, it will
52 * be incomplete because not all documentation has been converted yet.
53 */
54
55/**
56 * DOC: Frame format
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070057 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040058 * As a general rule, when frames are passed between mac80211 and the driver,
59 * they start with the IEEE 802.11 header and include the same octets that are
60 * sent over the air except for the FCS which should be calculated by the
61 * hardware.
62 *
63 * There are, however, various exceptions to this rule for advanced features:
64 *
65 * The first exception is for hardware encryption and decryption offload
66 * where the IV/ICV may or may not be generated in hardware.
67 *
68 * Secondly, when the hardware handles fragmentation, the frame handed to
69 * the driver from mac80211 is the MSDU, not the MPDU.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070070 */
71
Ron Rindjunsky10816d42007-11-26 16:14:30 +020072/**
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -040073 * DOC: mac80211 workqueue
74 *
75 * mac80211 provides its own workqueue for drivers and internal mac80211 use.
76 * The workqueue is a single threaded workqueue and can only be accessed by
77 * helpers for sanity checking. Drivers must ensure all work added onto the
78 * mac80211 workqueue should be cancelled on the driver stop() callback.
79 *
80 * mac80211 will flushed the workqueue upon interface removal and during
81 * suspend.
82 *
83 * All work performed on the mac80211 workqueue must not acquire the RTNL lock.
84 *
85 */
86
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +010087/**
88 * DOC: mac80211 software tx queueing
89 *
90 * mac80211 provides an optional intermediate queueing implementation designed
91 * to allow the driver to keep hardware queues short and provide some fairness
92 * between different stations/interfaces.
93 * In this model, the driver pulls data frames from the mac80211 queue instead
94 * of letting mac80211 push them via drv_tx().
95 * Other frames (e.g. control or management) are still pushed using drv_tx().
96 *
97 * Drivers indicate that they use this model by implementing the .wake_tx_queue
98 * driver operation.
99 *
100 * Intermediate queues (struct ieee80211_txq) are kept per-sta per-tid, with a
101 * single per-vif queue for multicast data frames.
102 *
103 * The driver is expected to initialize its private per-queue data for stations
104 * and interfaces in the .add_interface and .sta_add ops.
105 *
106 * The driver can't access the queue directly. To dequeue a frame, it calls
107 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue(). Whenever mac80211 adds a new frame to a queue, it
108 * calls the .wake_tx_queue driver op.
109 *
110 * For AP powersave TIM handling, the driver only needs to indicate if it has
111 * buffered packets in the driver specific data structures by calling
112 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(). For frames buffered in the ieee80211_txq
113 * struct, mac80211 sets the appropriate TIM PVB bits and calls
114 * .release_buffered_frames().
115 * In that callback the driver is therefore expected to release its own
116 * buffered frames and afterwards also frames from the ieee80211_txq (obtained
117 * via the usual ieee80211_tx_dequeue).
118 */
119
Paul Gortmaker313162d2012-01-30 11:46:54 -0500120struct device;
121
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -0400122/**
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +0200123 * enum ieee80211_max_queues - maximum number of queues
124 *
125 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES: Maximum number of regular device queues.
Johannes Berg445ea4e2013-02-13 12:25:28 +0100126 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP: bitmap with maximum queues set
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +0200127 */
128enum ieee80211_max_queues {
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200129 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES = 16,
Johannes Berg445ea4e2013-02-13 12:25:28 +0100130 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP = BIT(IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES) - 1,
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +0200131};
132
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200133#define IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE 0xff
134
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +0200135/**
Johannes Berg4bce22b2010-11-16 11:49:58 -0800136 * enum ieee80211_ac_numbers - AC numbers as used in mac80211
137 * @IEEE80211_AC_VO: voice
138 * @IEEE80211_AC_VI: video
139 * @IEEE80211_AC_BE: best effort
140 * @IEEE80211_AC_BK: background
141 */
142enum ieee80211_ac_numbers {
143 IEEE80211_AC_VO = 0,
144 IEEE80211_AC_VI = 1,
145 IEEE80211_AC_BE = 2,
146 IEEE80211_AC_BK = 3,
147};
Johannes Berg948d8872011-09-29 16:04:29 +0200148#define IEEE80211_NUM_ACS 4
Johannes Berg4bce22b2010-11-16 11:49:58 -0800149
150/**
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400151 * struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params - transmit queue configuration
152 *
153 * The information provided in this structure is required for QoS
Johannes Berg3330d7b2008-02-10 16:49:38 +0100154 * transmit queue configuration. Cf. IEEE 802.11 7.3.2.29.
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400155 *
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -0400156 * @aifs: arbitration interframe space [0..255]
Johannes Bergf434b2d2008-07-10 11:22:31 +0200157 * @cw_min: minimum contention window [a value of the form
158 * 2^n-1 in the range 1..32767]
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400159 * @cw_max: maximum contention window [like @cw_min]
Johannes Berg3330d7b2008-02-10 16:49:38 +0100160 * @txop: maximum burst time in units of 32 usecs, 0 meaning disabled
Alexander Bondar908f8d02013-04-07 09:53:30 +0300161 * @acm: is mandatory admission control required for the access category
Kalle Valo9d173fc2010-01-14 13:09:14 +0200162 * @uapsd: is U-APSD mode enabled for the queue
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400163 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700164struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params {
Johannes Bergf434b2d2008-07-10 11:22:31 +0200165 u16 txop;
Johannes Berg3330d7b2008-02-10 16:49:38 +0100166 u16 cw_min;
167 u16 cw_max;
Johannes Bergf434b2d2008-07-10 11:22:31 +0200168 u8 aifs;
Alexander Bondar908f8d02013-04-07 09:53:30 +0300169 bool acm;
Kalle Valoab133152010-01-12 10:42:31 +0200170 bool uapsd;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700171};
172
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700173struct ieee80211_low_level_stats {
174 unsigned int dot11ACKFailureCount;
175 unsigned int dot11RTSFailureCount;
176 unsigned int dot11FCSErrorCount;
177 unsigned int dot11RTSSuccessCount;
178};
179
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100180/**
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200181 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_change - change flag for channel context
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100182 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH: The channel width changed
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200183 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS: The number of RX chains changed
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100184 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR: radar detection flag changed
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +0200185 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL: switched to another operating channel,
186 * this is used only with channel switching with CSA
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200187 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH: The min required channel width changed
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200188 */
189enum ieee80211_chanctx_change {
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100190 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH = BIT(0),
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200191 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS = BIT(1),
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100192 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR = BIT(2),
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +0200193 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(3),
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200194 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH = BIT(4),
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200195};
196
197/**
198 * struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf - channel context that vifs may be tuned to
199 *
200 * This is the driver-visible part. The ieee80211_chanctx
201 * that contains it is visible in mac80211 only.
202 *
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100203 * @def: the channel definition
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200204 * @min_def: the minimum channel definition currently required.
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200205 * @rx_chains_static: The number of RX chains that must always be
206 * active on the channel to receive MIMO transmissions
207 * @rx_chains_dynamic: The number of RX chains that must be enabled
208 * after RTS/CTS handshake to receive SMPS MIMO transmissions;
Simon Wunderlich5d7fad42012-11-30 19:17:28 +0100209 * this will always be >= @rx_chains_static.
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100210 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled on this channel.
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200211 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
212 * sizeof(void *), size is determined in hw information.
213 */
214struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf {
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100215 struct cfg80211_chan_def def;
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200216 struct cfg80211_chan_def min_def;
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200217
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200218 u8 rx_chains_static, rx_chains_dynamic;
219
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100220 bool radar_enabled;
221
Johannes Berg1c06ef92012-12-28 12:22:02 +0100222 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200223};
224
225/**
Luciano Coelho1a5f0c12014-05-23 14:33:12 +0300226 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode - channel context switch mode
227 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF: Both old and new contexts already
228 * exist (and will continue to exist), but the virtual interface
229 * needs to be switched from one to the other.
230 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS: The old context exists but will stop
231 * to exist with this call, the new context doesn't exist but
232 * will be active after this call, the virtual interface switches
233 * from the old to the new (note that the driver may of course
234 * implement this as an on-the-fly chandef switch of the existing
235 * hardware context, but the mac80211 pointer for the old context
236 * will cease to exist and only the new one will later be used
237 * for changes/removal.)
238 */
239enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode {
240 CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF,
241 CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS,
242};
243
244/**
245 * struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch - vif chanctx switch information
246 *
247 * This is structure is used to pass information about a vif that
248 * needs to switch from one chanctx to another. The
249 * &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode defines how the switch should be
250 * done.
251 *
252 * @vif: the vif that should be switched from old_ctx to new_ctx
253 * @old_ctx: the old context to which the vif was assigned
254 * @new_ctx: the new context to which the vif must be assigned
255 */
256struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch {
257 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
258 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *old_ctx;
259 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *new_ctx;
260};
261
262/**
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100263 * enum ieee80211_bss_change - BSS change notification flags
264 *
265 * These flags are used with the bss_info_changed() callback
266 * to indicate which BSS parameter changed.
267 *
268 * @BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC: association status changed (associated/disassociated),
269 * also implies a change in the AID.
270 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT: CTS protection changed
271 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE: preamble changed
Jouni Malinen9f1ba902008-08-07 20:07:01 +0300272 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT: slot timing changed
Tomas Winkler38668c02008-03-28 16:33:32 -0700273 * @BSS_CHANGED_HT: 802.11n parameters changed
Johannes Berg96dd22a2008-09-11 00:01:57 +0200274 * @BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES: Basic rateset changed
Johannes Berg57c4d7b2009-04-23 16:10:04 +0200275 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT: Beacon interval changed
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200276 * @BSS_CHANGED_BSSID: BSSID changed, for whatever
277 * reason (IBSS and managed mode)
278 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON: Beacon data changed, retrieve
279 * new beacon (beaconing modes)
280 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED: Beaconing should be
281 * enabled/disabled (beaconing modes)
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200282 * @BSS_CHANGED_CQM: Connection quality monitor config changed
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200283 * @BSS_CHANGED_IBSS: IBSS join status changed
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300284 * @BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER: Hardware ARP filter address list or state changed.
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200285 * @BSS_CHANGED_QOS: QoS for this association was enabled/disabled. Note
286 * that it is only ever disabled for station mode.
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200287 * @BSS_CHANGED_IDLE: Idle changed for this BSS/interface.
Marek Puzyniak0ca54f62013-04-10 13:19:13 +0200288 * @BSS_CHANGED_SSID: SSID changed for this BSS (AP and IBSS mode)
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +0200289 * @BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP: Probe Response changed for this BSS (AP mode)
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300290 * @BSS_CHANGED_PS: PS changed for this BSS (STA mode)
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200291 * @BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER: TX power setting changed for this interface
Johannes Berg488dd7b2012-10-29 20:08:01 +0100292 * @BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS: P2P powersave settings (CTWindow, opportunistic PS)
293 * changed (currently only in P2P client mode, GO mode will be later)
Alexander Bondar989c6502013-05-16 17:34:17 +0300294 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO: Data from the AP's beacon became available:
295 * currently dtim_period only is under consideration.
Johannes Berg2c9b7352013-02-07 21:37:29 +0100296 * @BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH: The bandwidth used by this interface changed,
297 * note that this is only called when it changes after the channel
298 * context had been assigned.
Rostislav Lisovy239281f2014-11-03 10:33:19 +0100299 * @BSS_CHANGED_OCB: OCB join status changed
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100300 */
301enum ieee80211_bss_change {
302 BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC = 1<<0,
303 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT = 1<<1,
304 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE = 1<<2,
Jouni Malinen9f1ba902008-08-07 20:07:01 +0300305 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT = 1<<3,
Alexander Simona7ce1c92011-09-18 00:16:45 +0200306 BSS_CHANGED_HT = 1<<4,
Johannes Berg96dd22a2008-09-11 00:01:57 +0200307 BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES = 1<<5,
Johannes Berg57c4d7b2009-04-23 16:10:04 +0200308 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT = 1<<6,
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200309 BSS_CHANGED_BSSID = 1<<7,
310 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON = 1<<8,
311 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED = 1<<9,
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200312 BSS_CHANGED_CQM = 1<<10,
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200313 BSS_CHANGED_IBSS = 1<<11,
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300314 BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER = 1<<12,
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200315 BSS_CHANGED_QOS = 1<<13,
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200316 BSS_CHANGED_IDLE = 1<<14,
Arik Nemtsov78274932011-09-04 11:11:32 +0300317 BSS_CHANGED_SSID = 1<<15,
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +0200318 BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP = 1<<16,
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300319 BSS_CHANGED_PS = 1<<17,
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200320 BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER = 1<<18,
Johannes Berg488dd7b2012-10-29 20:08:01 +0100321 BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS = 1<<19,
Alexander Bondar989c6502013-05-16 17:34:17 +0300322 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO = 1<<20,
Johannes Berg2c9b7352013-02-07 21:37:29 +0100323 BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH = 1<<21,
Rostislav Lisovy239281f2014-11-03 10:33:19 +0100324 BSS_CHANGED_OCB = 1<<22,
Johannes Bergac8dd502010-05-05 09:44:02 +0200325
326 /* when adding here, make sure to change ieee80211_reconfig */
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100327};
328
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300329/*
330 * The maximum number of IPv4 addresses listed for ARP filtering. If the number
331 * of addresses for an interface increase beyond this value, hardware ARP
332 * filtering will be disabled.
333 */
334#define IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN 4
335
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100336/**
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200337 * enum ieee80211_event_type - event to be notified to the low level driver
338 * @RSSI_EVENT: AP's rssi crossed the a threshold set by the driver.
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200339 * @MLME_EVENT: event related to MLME
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -0700340 */
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200341enum ieee80211_event_type {
342 RSSI_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200343 MLME_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200344};
345
346/**
347 * enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data - relevant when event type is %RSSI_EVENT
348 * @RSSI_EVENT_HIGH: AP's rssi went below the threshold set by the driver.
349 * @RSSI_EVENT_LOW: AP's rssi went above the threshold set by the driver.
350 */
351enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data {
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -0700352 RSSI_EVENT_HIGH,
353 RSSI_EVENT_LOW,
354};
355
356/**
Jonathan Corbet3a7af582015-04-13 18:27:35 +0200357 * struct ieee80211_rssi_event - data attached to an %RSSI_EVENT
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200358 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data
359 */
360struct ieee80211_rssi_event {
361 enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data data;
362};
363
364/**
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200365 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
366 * @AUTH_EVENT: the MLME operation is authentication
Emmanuel Grumbachd0d1a122015-03-16 23:23:36 +0200367 * @ASSOC_EVENT: the MLME operation is association
Emmanuel Grumbacha90faa92015-03-16 23:23:37 +0200368 * @DEAUTH_RX_EVENT: deauth received..
369 * @DEAUTH_TX_EVENT: deauth sent.
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200370 */
371enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data {
372 AUTH_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbachd0d1a122015-03-16 23:23:36 +0200373 ASSOC_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbacha90faa92015-03-16 23:23:37 +0200374 DEAUTH_RX_EVENT,
375 DEAUTH_TX_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200376};
377
378/**
379 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
380 * @MLME_SUCCESS: the MLME operation completed successfully.
381 * @MLME_DENIED: the MLME operation was denied by the peer.
382 * @MLME_TIMEOUT: the MLME operation timed out.
383 */
384enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status {
385 MLME_SUCCESS,
386 MLME_DENIED,
387 MLME_TIMEOUT,
388};
389
390/**
Jonathan Corbet3a7af582015-04-13 18:27:35 +0200391 * struct ieee80211_mlme_event - data attached to an %MLME_EVENT
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200392 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data
393 * @status: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status
394 * @reason: the reason code if applicable
395 */
396struct ieee80211_mlme_event {
397 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data data;
398 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status status;
399 u16 reason;
400};
401
402/**
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200403 * struct ieee80211_event - event to be sent to the driver
Jonathan Corbet3a7af582015-04-13 18:27:35 +0200404 * @type: The event itself. See &enum ieee80211_event_type.
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200405 * @rssi: relevant if &type is %RSSI_EVENT
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200406 * @mlme: relevant if &type is %AUTH_EVENT
Jonathan Corbet3a7af582015-04-13 18:27:35 +0200407 * @u: union holding the above two fields
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200408 */
409struct ieee80211_event {
410 enum ieee80211_event_type type;
411 union {
412 struct ieee80211_rssi_event rssi;
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200413 struct ieee80211_mlme_event mlme;
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200414 } u;
415};
416
417/**
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100418 * struct ieee80211_bss_conf - holds the BSS's changing parameters
419 *
420 * This structure keeps information about a BSS (and an association
421 * to that BSS) that can change during the lifetime of the BSS.
422 *
423 * @assoc: association status
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200424 * @ibss_joined: indicates whether this station is part of an IBSS
425 * or not
Sujith Manoharanc13a7652012-10-12 17:35:45 +0530426 * @ibss_creator: indicates if a new IBSS network is being created
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100427 * @aid: association ID number, valid only when @assoc is true
428 * @use_cts_prot: use CTS protection
Johannes Berg7a5158e2008-10-08 10:59:33 +0200429 * @use_short_preamble: use 802.11b short preamble;
430 * if the hardware cannot handle this it must set the
431 * IEEE80211_HW_2GHZ_SHORT_PREAMBLE_INCAPABLE hardware flag
432 * @use_short_slot: use short slot time (only relevant for ERP);
433 * if the hardware cannot handle this it must set the
434 * IEEE80211_HW_2GHZ_SHORT_SLOT_INCAPABLE hardware flag
Johannes Berg56007a02010-01-26 14:19:52 +0100435 * @dtim_period: num of beacons before the next DTIM, for beaconing,
Emmanuel Grumbachc65dd142012-12-12 10:12:24 +0200436 * valid in station mode only if after the driver was notified
Alexander Bondar989c6502013-05-16 17:34:17 +0300437 * with the %BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO flag, will be non-zero then.
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200438 * @sync_tsf: last beacon's/probe response's TSF timestamp (could be old
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +0100439 * as it may have been received during scanning long ago). If the
440 * HW flag %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY is set, then this can
441 * only come from a beacon, but might not become valid until after
442 * association when a beacon is received (which is notified with the
Alexander Bondar2ecc3902015-03-01 09:10:00 +0200443 * %BSS_CHANGED_DTIM flag.). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200444 * @sync_device_ts: the device timestamp corresponding to the sync_tsf,
445 * the driver/device can use this to calculate synchronisation
Alexander Bondar2ecc3902015-03-01 09:10:00 +0200446 * (see @sync_tsf). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +0100447 * @sync_dtim_count: Only valid when %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY
448 * is requested, see @sync_tsf/@sync_device_ts.
Alexander Bondar2ecc3902015-03-01 09:10:00 +0200449 * IMPORTANT: These three sync_* parameters would possibly be out of sync
450 * by the time the driver will use them. The synchronized view is currently
451 * guaranteed only in certain callbacks.
Tomas Winkler21c0cbe2008-03-28 16:33:34 -0700452 * @beacon_int: beacon interval
Emmanuel Grumbach98f7dfd2008-07-18 13:52:59 +0800453 * @assoc_capability: capabilities taken from assoc resp
Johannes Berg96dd22a2008-09-11 00:01:57 +0200454 * @basic_rates: bitmap of basic rates, each bit stands for an
455 * index into the rate table configured by the driver in
456 * the current band.
Alexander Bondar817cee72013-05-19 14:23:57 +0300457 * @beacon_rate: associated AP's beacon TX rate
Felix Fietkaudd5b4cc2010-11-22 20:58:24 +0100458 * @mcast_rate: per-band multicast rate index + 1 (0: disabled)
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200459 * @bssid: The BSSID for this BSS
460 * @enable_beacon: whether beaconing should be enabled or not
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100461 * @chandef: Channel definition for this BSS -- the hardware might be
462 * configured a higher bandwidth than this BSS uses, for example.
Johannes Berg074d46d2012-03-15 19:45:16 +0100463 * @ht_operation_mode: HT operation mode like in &struct ieee80211_ht_operation.
Johannes Berg9ed6bcc2009-05-08 20:47:39 +0200464 * This field is only valid when the channel type is one of the HT types.
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200465 * @cqm_rssi_thold: Connection quality monitor RSSI threshold, a zero value
466 * implies disabled
467 * @cqm_rssi_hyst: Connection quality monitor RSSI hysteresis
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300468 * @arp_addr_list: List of IPv4 addresses for hardware ARP filtering. The
469 * may filter ARP queries targeted for other addresses than listed here.
470 * The driver must allow ARP queries targeted for all address listed here
471 * to pass through. An empty list implies no ARP queries need to pass.
Johannes Berg0f19b412013-01-14 16:39:07 +0100472 * @arp_addr_cnt: Number of addresses currently on the list. Note that this
473 * may be larger than %IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN (the arp_addr_list
474 * array size), it's up to the driver what to do in that case.
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200475 * @qos: This is a QoS-enabled BSS.
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200476 * @idle: This interface is idle. There's also a global idle flag in the
477 * hardware config which may be more appropriate depending on what
478 * your driver/device needs to do.
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300479 * @ps: power-save mode (STA only). This flag is NOT affected by
480 * offchannel/dynamic_ps operations.
Marek Puzyniak0ca54f62013-04-10 13:19:13 +0200481 * @ssid: The SSID of the current vif. Valid in AP and IBSS mode.
Arik Nemtsov78274932011-09-04 11:11:32 +0300482 * @ssid_len: Length of SSID given in @ssid.
483 * @hidden_ssid: The SSID of the current vif is hidden. Only valid in AP-mode.
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200484 * @txpower: TX power in dBm
Lorenzo Bianconidb82d8a2015-01-14 12:55:08 +0100485 * @txpower_type: TX power adjustment used to control per packet Transmit
486 * Power Control (TPC) in lower driver for the current vif. In particular
487 * TPC is enabled if value passed in %txpower_type is
488 * NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED (allow using less than specified from
489 * userspace), whereas TPC is disabled if %txpower_type is set to
490 * NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED (use value configured from userspace)
Janusz Dziedzic67baf662013-03-21 15:47:56 +0100491 * @p2p_noa_attr: P2P NoA attribute for P2P powersave
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100492 */
493struct ieee80211_bss_conf {
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200494 const u8 *bssid;
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100495 /* association related data */
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200496 bool assoc, ibss_joined;
Sujith Manoharanc13a7652012-10-12 17:35:45 +0530497 bool ibss_creator;
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100498 u16 aid;
499 /* erp related data */
500 bool use_cts_prot;
501 bool use_short_preamble;
Jouni Malinen9f1ba902008-08-07 20:07:01 +0300502 bool use_short_slot;
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200503 bool enable_beacon;
Emmanuel Grumbach98f7dfd2008-07-18 13:52:59 +0800504 u8 dtim_period;
Tomas Winkler21c0cbe2008-03-28 16:33:34 -0700505 u16 beacon_int;
506 u16 assoc_capability;
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200507 u64 sync_tsf;
508 u32 sync_device_ts;
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +0100509 u8 sync_dtim_count;
Johannes Berg881d9482009-01-21 15:13:48 +0100510 u32 basic_rates;
Alexander Bondar817cee72013-05-19 14:23:57 +0300511 struct ieee80211_rate *beacon_rate;
Felix Fietkaudd5b4cc2010-11-22 20:58:24 +0100512 int mcast_rate[IEEE80211_NUM_BANDS];
Johannes Berg9ed6bcc2009-05-08 20:47:39 +0200513 u16 ht_operation_mode;
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200514 s32 cqm_rssi_thold;
515 u32 cqm_rssi_hyst;
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100516 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300517 __be32 arp_addr_list[IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN];
Johannes Berg0f19b412013-01-14 16:39:07 +0100518 int arp_addr_cnt;
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200519 bool qos;
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200520 bool idle;
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300521 bool ps;
Arik Nemtsov78274932011-09-04 11:11:32 +0300522 u8 ssid[IEEE80211_MAX_SSID_LEN];
523 size_t ssid_len;
524 bool hidden_ssid;
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200525 int txpower;
Lorenzo Bianconidb82d8a2015-01-14 12:55:08 +0100526 enum nl80211_tx_power_setting txpower_type;
Janusz Dziedzic67baf662013-03-21 15:47:56 +0100527 struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr p2p_noa_attr;
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100528};
529
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800530/**
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200531 * enum mac80211_tx_info_flags - flags to describe transmission information/status
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800532 *
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -0700533 * These flags are used with the @flags member of &ieee80211_tx_info.
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800534 *
Johannes Berg7351c6b2009-11-19 01:08:30 +0100535 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS: require TX status callback for this frame.
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200536 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ: The driver has to assign a sequence
537 * number to this frame, taking care of not overwriting the fragment
538 * number and increasing the sequence number only when the
539 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT flag is set. mac80211 will properly
540 * assign sequence numbers to QoS-data frames but cannot do so correctly
541 * for non-QoS-data and management frames because beacons need them from
542 * that counter as well and mac80211 cannot guarantee proper sequencing.
543 * If this flag is set, the driver should instruct the hardware to
544 * assign a sequence number to the frame or assign one itself. Cf. IEEE
545 * 802.11-2007 7.1.3.4.1 paragraph 3. This flag will always be set for
546 * beacons and always be clear for frames without a sequence number field.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200547 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK: tell the low level not to wait for an ack
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200548 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT: clear powersave filter for destination
549 * station
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200550 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT: this is a first fragment of the frame
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200551 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM: send this frame after DTIM beacon
552 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU: this frame should be sent as part of an A-MPDU
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200553 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED: Frame was injected, internal to mac80211.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200554 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED: The frame was not transmitted
Johannes Bergab5b5342009-08-07 16:28:09 +0200555 * because the destination STA was in powersave mode. Note that to
556 * avoid race conditions, the filter must be set by the hardware or
557 * firmware upon receiving a frame that indicates that the station
558 * went to sleep (must be done on device to filter frames already on
559 * the queue) and may only be unset after mac80211 gives the OK for
560 * that by setting the IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT (see above),
561 * since only then is it guaranteed that no more frames are in the
562 * hardware queue.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200563 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK: Frame was acknowledged
564 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU: The frame was aggregated, so status
565 * is for the whole aggregation.
Ron Rindjunsky429a3802008-07-01 14:16:03 +0300566 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK: no block ack was returned,
567 * so consider using block ack request (BAR).
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200568 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE: internal to mac80211, can be
569 * set by rate control algorithms to indicate probe rate, will
570 * be cleared for fragmented frames (except on the last fragment)
Seth Forshee6c17b772013-02-11 11:21:07 -0600571 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK: Internal to mac80211. Used to indicate
572 * that a frame can be transmitted while the queues are stopped for
573 * off-channel operation.
Johannes Bergcd8ffc82009-03-23 17:28:41 +0100574 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING: completely internal to mac80211,
575 * used to indicate that a pending frame requires TX processing before
576 * it can be sent out.
Johannes Berg8f77f382009-06-07 21:58:37 +0200577 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED: completely internal to mac80211,
578 * used to indicate that a frame was already retried due to PS
Johannes Berg3b8d81e02009-06-17 17:43:56 +0200579 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT: completely internal to mac80211,
580 * used to indicate frame should not be encrypted
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +0100581 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER: This frame is a response to a poll
582 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD) or a non-bufferable MMPDU and must
583 * be sent although the station is in powersave mode.
Johannes Bergad5351d2009-08-07 16:42:15 +0200584 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES: More frames will be passed to the
585 * transmit function after the current frame, this can be used
586 * by drivers to kick the DMA queue only if unset or when the
587 * queue gets full.
Johannes Bergc6fcf6b2010-01-17 01:47:59 +0100588 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION: This frame is being retransmitted
589 * after TX status because the destination was asleep, it must not
590 * be modified again (no seqno assignment, crypto, etc.)
Johannes Berg1672c0e32013-01-29 15:02:27 +0100591 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX: This frame was transmitted by the MLME
592 * code for connection establishment, this indicates that its status
593 * should kick the MLME state machine.
Jouni Malinen026331c2010-02-15 12:53:10 +0200594 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX: Frame was requested through nl80211
595 * MLME command (internal to mac80211 to figure out whether to send TX
596 * status to user space)
Luis R. Rodriguez0a56bd02010-04-15 17:39:37 -0400597 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC: tells the driver to use LDPC for this frame
Felix Fietkauf79d9ba2010-04-19 19:57:35 +0200598 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC: Enables Space-Time Block Coding (STBC) for this
599 * frame and selects the maximum number of streams that it can use.
Johannes Berg610dbc92011-01-06 22:36:44 +0100600 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN: Marks this packet to be transmitted on
601 * the off-channel channel when a remain-on-channel offload is done
602 * in hardware -- normal packets still flow and are expected to be
603 * handled properly by the device.
Jouni Malinen681d1192011-02-03 18:35:19 +0200604 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE: Marks this packet to be used for TKIP
605 * testing. It will be sent out with incorrect Michael MIC key to allow
606 * TKIP countermeasures to be tested.
Rajkumar Manoharanaad14ce2011-09-25 14:53:31 +0530607 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE: This frame will be sent at non CCK rate.
608 * This flag is actually used for management frame especially for P2P
609 * frames not being sent at CCK rate in 2GHz band.
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +0200610 * @IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP: This packet marks the end of service period,
611 * when its status is reported the service period ends. For frames in
612 * an SP that mac80211 transmits, it is already set; for driver frames
Johannes Bergdeeaee12011-09-29 16:04:35 +0200613 * the driver may set this flag. It is also used to do the same for
614 * PS-Poll responses.
Rajkumar Manoharanb6f35302011-09-29 20:34:04 +0530615 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE: This frame will be sent at lowest rate.
616 * This flag is used to send nullfunc frame at minimum rate when
617 * the nullfunc is used for connection monitoring purpose.
Johannes Berga26eb272011-10-07 14:01:25 +0200618 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG: Don't fragment this packet even if it
619 * would be fragmented by size (this is optional, only used for
620 * monitor injection).
Sujith Manoharan5cf16612014-12-10 21:26:11 +0530621 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED: A frame that was marked with
622 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK has been successfully transmitted without
623 * any errors (like issues specific to the driver/HW).
624 * This flag must not be set for frames that don't request no-ack
625 * behaviour with IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK.
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200626 *
627 * Note: If you have to add new flags to the enumeration, then don't
628 * forget to update %IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS when necessary.
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800629 */
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200630enum mac80211_tx_info_flags {
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200631 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS = BIT(0),
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200632 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ = BIT(1),
633 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK = BIT(2),
634 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT = BIT(3),
635 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT = BIT(4),
636 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM = BIT(5),
637 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU = BIT(6),
638 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED = BIT(7),
639 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED = BIT(8),
640 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK = BIT(9),
641 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU = BIT(10),
642 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK = BIT(11),
643 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE = BIT(12),
Seth Forshee6c17b772013-02-11 11:21:07 -0600644 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK = BIT(13),
Johannes Bergcd8ffc82009-03-23 17:28:41 +0100645 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING = BIT(14),
Johannes Berg8f77f382009-06-07 21:58:37 +0200646 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED = BIT(15),
Johannes Berg3b8d81e02009-06-17 17:43:56 +0200647 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT = BIT(16),
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +0100648 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER = BIT(17),
Johannes Bergad5351d2009-08-07 16:42:15 +0200649 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES = BIT(18),
Johannes Bergc6fcf6b2010-01-17 01:47:59 +0100650 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION = BIT(19),
Johannes Berg1672c0e32013-01-29 15:02:27 +0100651 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX = BIT(20),
Jouni Malinen026331c2010-02-15 12:53:10 +0200652 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX = BIT(21),
Luis R. Rodriguez0a56bd02010-04-15 17:39:37 -0400653 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC = BIT(22),
Felix Fietkauf79d9ba2010-04-19 19:57:35 +0200654 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC = BIT(23) | BIT(24),
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +0100655 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN = BIT(25),
Jouni Malinen681d1192011-02-03 18:35:19 +0200656 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE = BIT(26),
Rajkumar Manoharanaad14ce2011-09-25 14:53:31 +0530657 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE = BIT(27),
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +0200658 IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP = BIT(28),
Rajkumar Manoharanb6f35302011-09-29 20:34:04 +0530659 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE = BIT(29),
Johannes Berga26eb272011-10-07 14:01:25 +0200660 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG = BIT(30),
Sujith Manoharan5cf16612014-12-10 21:26:11 +0530661 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED = BIT(31),
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200662};
663
Johannes Bergabe37c42010-06-07 11:12:27 +0200664#define IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC_SHIFT 23
665
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200666/**
667 * enum mac80211_tx_control_flags - flags to describe transmit control
668 *
669 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO: this frame is a port control
670 * protocol frame (e.g. EAP)
Sujith Manoharan6b127c72014-12-10 21:26:10 +0530671 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE: This frame is a response to a poll
672 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD).
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200673 *
674 * These flags are used in tx_info->control.flags.
675 */
676enum mac80211_tx_control_flags {
677 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO = BIT(0),
Sujith Manoharan6b127c72014-12-10 21:26:10 +0530678 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE = BIT(1),
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200679};
680
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200681/*
682 * This definition is used as a mask to clear all temporary flags, which are
683 * set by the tx handlers for each transmission attempt by the mac80211 stack.
684 */
685#define IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS (IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK | \
686 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT | \
687 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU | \
688 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK | \
689 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK | \
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +0100690 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER | \
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200691 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC | \
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +0200692 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC | IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200693
Sujith2134e7e2009-01-22 09:00:52 +0530694/**
695 * enum mac80211_rate_control_flags - per-rate flags set by the
696 * Rate Control algorithm.
697 *
698 * These flags are set by the Rate control algorithm for each rate during tx,
699 * in the @flags member of struct ieee80211_tx_rate.
700 *
701 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS: Use RTS/CTS exchange for this rate.
702 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT: CTS-to-self protection is required.
703 * This is set if the current BSS requires ERP protection.
704 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE: Use short preamble.
705 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS: HT rate.
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100706 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS: VHT MCS rate, in this case the idx field is split
707 * into a higher 4 bits (Nss) and lower 4 bits (MCS number)
Sujith2134e7e2009-01-22 09:00:52 +0530708 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD: Indicates whether this rate should be used in
709 * Greenfield mode.
710 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates if the Channel Width should be 40 MHz.
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100711 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 80 MHz transmission
712 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 160 MHz transmission
713 * (80+80 isn't supported yet)
Sujith2134e7e2009-01-22 09:00:52 +0530714 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA: The frame should be transmitted on both of the
715 * adjacent 20 MHz channels, if the current channel type is
716 * NL80211_CHAN_HT40MINUS or NL80211_CHAN_HT40PLUS.
717 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI: Short Guard interval should be used for this rate.
718 */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200719enum mac80211_rate_control_flags {
720 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS = BIT(0),
721 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT = BIT(1),
722 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE = BIT(2),
723
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100724 /* rate index is an HT/VHT MCS instead of an index */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200725 IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS = BIT(3),
726 IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD = BIT(4),
727 IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(5),
728 IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA = BIT(6),
729 IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100730 IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS = BIT(8),
731 IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(9),
732 IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(10),
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800733};
734
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200735
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200736/* there are 40 bytes if you don't need the rateset to be kept */
737#define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 40
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200738
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200739/* if you do need the rateset, then you have less space */
740#define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 24
741
742/* maximum number of rate stages */
Thomas Huehne3e1a0b2012-07-02 19:46:16 +0200743#define IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES 4
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200744
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +0200745/* maximum number of rate table entries */
746#define IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE 4
747
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200748/**
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200749 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate - rate selection/status
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200750 *
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200751 * @idx: rate index to attempt to send with
752 * @flags: rate control flags (&enum mac80211_rate_control_flags)
Johannes Berge25cf4a2008-10-23 08:51:20 +0200753 * @count: number of tries in this rate before going to the next rate
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200754 *
755 * A value of -1 for @idx indicates an invalid rate and, if used
756 * in an array of retry rates, that no more rates should be tried.
757 *
758 * When used for transmit status reporting, the driver should
759 * always report the rate along with the flags it used.
Johannes Bergc555b9b2009-08-07 16:23:43 +0200760 *
761 * &struct ieee80211_tx_info contains an array of these structs
762 * in the control information, and it will be filled by the rate
763 * control algorithm according to what should be sent. For example,
764 * if this array contains, in the format { <idx>, <count> } the
765 * information
766 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 4 }, { -1, 0 }, { -1, 0 }
767 * then this means that the frame should be transmitted
768 * up to twice at rate 3, up to twice at rate 2, and up to four
769 * times at rate 1 if it doesn't get acknowledged. Say it gets
770 * acknowledged by the peer after the fifth attempt, the status
771 * information should then contain
772 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 1 }, { -1, 0 } ...
773 * since it was transmitted twice at rate 3, twice at rate 2
774 * and once at rate 1 after which we received an acknowledgement.
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200775 */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200776struct ieee80211_tx_rate {
777 s8 idx;
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100778 u16 count:5,
779 flags:11;
Gustavo F. Padovan3f30fc12010-07-21 10:59:58 +0000780} __packed;
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200781
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100782#define IEEE80211_MAX_TX_RETRY 31
783
784static inline void ieee80211_rate_set_vht(struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate,
785 u8 mcs, u8 nss)
786{
787 WARN_ON(mcs & ~0xF);
Karl Beldan6bc83122013-04-15 17:09:29 +0200788 WARN_ON((nss - 1) & ~0x7);
789 rate->idx = ((nss - 1) << 4) | mcs;
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100790}
791
792static inline u8
793ieee80211_rate_get_vht_mcs(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
794{
795 return rate->idx & 0xF;
796}
797
798static inline u8
799ieee80211_rate_get_vht_nss(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
800{
Karl Beldan6bc83122013-04-15 17:09:29 +0200801 return (rate->idx >> 4) + 1;
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100802}
803
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200804/**
805 * struct ieee80211_tx_info - skb transmit information
Ivo van Doorn1c014422008-04-17 19:41:02 +0200806 *
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200807 * This structure is placed in skb->cb for three uses:
808 * (1) mac80211 TX control - mac80211 tells the driver what to do
809 * (2) driver internal use (if applicable)
810 * (3) TX status information - driver tells mac80211 what happened
811 *
812 * @flags: transmit info flags, defined above
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200813 * @band: the band to transmit on (use for checking for races)
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200814 * @hw_queue: HW queue to put the frame on, skb_get_queue_mapping() gives the AC
Johannes Berga729cff2011-11-06 14:13:34 +0100815 * @ack_frame_id: internal frame ID for TX status, used internally
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -0700816 * @control: union for control data
817 * @status: union for status data
818 * @driver_data: array of driver_data pointers
Felix Fietkau599bf6a2009-11-15 23:07:30 +0100819 * @ampdu_ack_len: number of acked aggregated frames.
Daniel Halperin93d95b12010-04-18 09:28:18 -0700820 * relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
Felix Fietkau599bf6a2009-11-15 23:07:30 +0100821 * @ampdu_len: number of aggregated frames.
Daniel Halperin93d95b12010-04-18 09:28:18 -0700822 * relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200823 * @ack_signal: signal strength of the ACK frame
Ivo van Doorn1c014422008-04-17 19:41:02 +0200824 */
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200825struct ieee80211_tx_info {
826 /* common information */
827 u32 flags;
828 u8 band;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200829
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200830 u8 hw_queue;
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +0100831
Johannes Berga729cff2011-11-06 14:13:34 +0100832 u16 ack_frame_id;
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +0100833
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200834 union {
835 struct {
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200836 union {
837 /* rate control */
838 struct {
839 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[
840 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
841 s8 rts_cts_rate_idx;
Felix Fietkau991fec02013-04-16 13:38:43 +0200842 u8 use_rts:1;
843 u8 use_cts_prot:1;
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +0200844 u8 short_preamble:1;
845 u8 skip_table:1;
Felix Fietkau991fec02013-04-16 13:38:43 +0200846 /* 2 bytes free */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200847 };
848 /* only needed before rate control */
849 unsigned long jiffies;
850 };
Johannes Berg25d834e2008-09-12 22:52:47 +0200851 /* NB: vif can be NULL for injected frames */
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200852 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
853 struct ieee80211_key_conf *hw_key;
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200854 u32 flags;
855 /* 4 bytes free */
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200856 } control;
857 struct {
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200858 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
Eliad Pellera0f995a2014-03-13 14:30:47 +0200859 s32 ack_signal;
Thomas Huehne3e1a0b2012-07-02 19:46:16 +0200860 u8 ampdu_ack_len;
Felix Fietkau599bf6a2009-11-15 23:07:30 +0100861 u8 ampdu_len;
Johannes Bergd748b462012-03-28 11:04:23 +0200862 u8 antenna;
Johannes Berg02219b32014-10-07 10:38:50 +0300863 u16 tx_time;
864 void *status_driver_data[19 / sizeof(void *)];
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200865 } status;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200866 struct {
867 struct ieee80211_tx_rate driver_rates[
868 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +0200869 u8 pad[4];
870
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200871 void *rate_driver_data[
872 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
873 };
874 void *driver_data[
875 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200876 };
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700877};
878
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +0300879/**
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +0200880 * struct ieee80211_scan_ies - descriptors for different blocks of IEs
881 *
David Spinadel633e2712014-02-06 16:15:23 +0200882 * This structure is used to point to different blocks of IEs in HW scan
883 * and scheduled scan. These blocks contain the IEs passed by userspace
884 * and the ones generated by mac80211.
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +0200885 *
886 * @ies: pointers to band specific IEs.
887 * @len: lengths of band_specific IEs.
888 * @common_ies: IEs for all bands (especially vendor specific ones)
889 * @common_ie_len: length of the common_ies
890 */
891struct ieee80211_scan_ies {
892 const u8 *ies[IEEE80211_NUM_BANDS];
893 size_t len[IEEE80211_NUM_BANDS];
894 const u8 *common_ies;
895 size_t common_ie_len;
896};
897
898
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200899static inline struct ieee80211_tx_info *IEEE80211_SKB_CB(struct sk_buff *skb)
900{
901 return (struct ieee80211_tx_info *)skb->cb;
902}
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400903
Johannes Bergf1d58c22009-06-17 13:13:00 +0200904static inline struct ieee80211_rx_status *IEEE80211_SKB_RXCB(struct sk_buff *skb)
905{
906 return (struct ieee80211_rx_status *)skb->cb;
907}
908
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200909/**
910 * ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status - clear TX status
911 *
912 * @info: The &struct ieee80211_tx_info to be cleared.
913 *
914 * When the driver passes an skb back to mac80211, it must report
915 * a number of things in TX status. This function clears everything
916 * in the TX status but the rate control information (it does clear
917 * the count since you need to fill that in anyway).
918 *
919 * NOTE: You can only use this function if you do NOT use
920 * info->driver_data! Use info->rate_driver_data
921 * instead if you need only the less space that allows.
922 */
923static inline void
924ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
925{
926 int i;
927
928 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
929 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, control.rates));
930 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
931 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, driver_rates));
932 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 8);
933 /* clear the rate counts */
934 for (i = 0; i < IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES; i++)
935 info->status.rates[i].count = 0;
936
937 BUILD_BUG_ON(
Thomas Huehne3e1a0b2012-07-02 19:46:16 +0200938 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ack_signal) != 20);
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200939 memset(&info->status.ampdu_ack_len, 0,
940 sizeof(struct ieee80211_tx_info) -
941 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ampdu_ack_len));
942}
943
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400944
945/**
946 * enum mac80211_rx_flags - receive flags
947 *
948 * These flags are used with the @flag member of &struct ieee80211_rx_status.
949 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR: Michael MIC error was reported on this frame.
950 * Use together with %RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED.
951 * @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED: This frame was decrypted in hardware.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400952 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED: the Michael MIC is stripped off this frame,
953 * verification has been done by the hardware.
954 * @RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED: The IV/ICV are stripped from this frame.
955 * If this flag is set, the stack cannot do any replay detection
956 * hence the driver or hardware will have to do that.
Johannes Berg72abd812007-09-17 01:29:22 -0400957 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC: Set this flag if the FCS check failed on
958 * the frame.
959 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC: Set this flag if the PCLP check failed on
960 * the frame.
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -0800961 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
Johannes Berg6ebacbb2011-02-23 15:06:08 +0100962 * field) is valid and contains the time the first symbol of the MPDU
963 * was received. This is useful in monitor mode and for proper IBSS
964 * merging.
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -0800965 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
966 * field) is valid and contains the time the last symbol of the MPDU
967 * (including FCS) was received.
Bruno Randolfb4f28bb2008-07-30 17:19:55 +0200968 * @RX_FLAG_SHORTPRE: Short preamble was used for this frame
Jouni Malinen0fb8ca42008-12-12 14:38:33 +0200969 * @RX_FLAG_HT: HT MCS was used and rate_idx is MCS index
Johannes Berg56146182012-11-09 15:07:02 +0100970 * @RX_FLAG_VHT: VHT MCS was used and rate_index is MCS index
Jouni Malinen0fb8ca42008-12-12 14:38:33 +0200971 * @RX_FLAG_40MHZ: HT40 (40 MHz) was used
972 * @RX_FLAG_SHORT_GI: Short guard interval was used
Felix Fietkaufe8431f2012-03-01 18:00:07 +0100973 * @RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL: The signal strength value is not present.
974 * Valid only for data frames (mainly A-MPDU)
Johannes Bergac55d2f2012-05-10 09:09:10 +0200975 * @RX_FLAG_HT_GF: This frame was received in a HT-greenfield transmission, if
976 * the driver fills this value it should add %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_FMT
977 * to hw.radiotap_mcs_details to advertise that fact
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +0200978 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS: A-MPDU details are known, in particular the reference
979 * number (@ampdu_reference) must be populated and be a distinct number for
980 * each A-MPDU
981 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_REPORT_ZEROLEN: driver reports 0-length subframes
982 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_ZEROLEN: This is a zero-length subframe, for
983 * monitoring purposes only
984 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN: last subframe is known, should be set on all
985 * subframes of a single A-MPDU
986 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST: this subframe is the last subframe of the A-MPDU
987 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR: A delimiter CRC error has been detected
988 * on this subframe
989 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN: The delimiter CRC field is known (the CRC
990 * is stored in the @ampdu_delimiter_crc field)
Emmanuel Grumbach63c361f2014-02-05 12:48:53 +0200991 * @RX_FLAG_LDPC: LDPC was used
Oleksij Rempel786677d2013-05-24 12:05:45 +0200992 * @RX_FLAG_STBC_MASK: STBC 2 bit bitmask. 1 - Nss=1, 2 - Nss=2, 3 - Nss=3
Simon Wunderlicha5e70692013-07-08 16:55:52 +0200993 * @RX_FLAG_10MHZ: 10 MHz (half channel) was used
994 * @RX_FLAG_5MHZ: 5 MHz (quarter channel) was used
Michal Kazior0cfcefe2013-09-23 15:34:38 +0200995 * @RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE: Some drivers may prefer to report separate A-MSDU
996 * subframes instead of a one huge frame for performance reasons.
997 * All, but the last MSDU from an A-MSDU should have this flag set. E.g.
998 * if an A-MSDU has 3 frames, the first 2 must have the flag set, while
999 * the 3rd (last) one must not have this flag set. The flag is used to
1000 * deal with retransmission/duplication recovery properly since A-MSDU
1001 * subframes share the same sequence number. Reported subframes can be
1002 * either regular MSDU or singly A-MSDUs. Subframes must not be
1003 * interleaved with other frames.
Johannes Berg1f7bba72014-11-06 22:56:36 +01001004 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA: This frame contains vendor-specific
1005 * radiotap data in the skb->data (before the frame) as described by
1006 * the &struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001007 */
1008enum mac80211_rx_flags {
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001009 RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR = BIT(0),
1010 RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED = BIT(1),
1011 RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED = BIT(3),
1012 RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED = BIT(4),
1013 RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC = BIT(5),
1014 RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC = BIT(6),
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -08001015 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001016 RX_FLAG_SHORTPRE = BIT(8),
1017 RX_FLAG_HT = BIT(9),
1018 RX_FLAG_40MHZ = BIT(10),
1019 RX_FLAG_SHORT_GI = BIT(11),
1020 RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL = BIT(12),
1021 RX_FLAG_HT_GF = BIT(13),
1022 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS = BIT(14),
1023 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_REPORT_ZEROLEN = BIT(15),
1024 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_ZEROLEN = BIT(16),
1025 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN = BIT(17),
1026 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST = BIT(18),
1027 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR = BIT(19),
1028 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN = BIT(20),
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -08001029 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END = BIT(21),
Johannes Berg56146182012-11-09 15:07:02 +01001030 RX_FLAG_VHT = BIT(22),
Emmanuel Grumbach63c361f2014-02-05 12:48:53 +02001031 RX_FLAG_LDPC = BIT(23),
Oleksij Rempel786677d2013-05-24 12:05:45 +02001032 RX_FLAG_STBC_MASK = BIT(26) | BIT(27),
Simon Wunderlicha5e70692013-07-08 16:55:52 +02001033 RX_FLAG_10MHZ = BIT(28),
1034 RX_FLAG_5MHZ = BIT(29),
Michal Kazior0cfcefe2013-09-23 15:34:38 +02001035 RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE = BIT(30),
Johannes Berg1f7bba72014-11-06 22:56:36 +01001036 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA = BIT(31),
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001037};
1038
Oleksij Rempel786677d2013-05-24 12:05:45 +02001039#define RX_FLAG_STBC_SHIFT 26
1040
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001041/**
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001042 * enum mac80211_rx_vht_flags - receive VHT flags
1043 *
1044 * These flags are used with the @vht_flag member of
1045 * &struct ieee80211_rx_status.
1046 * @RX_VHT_FLAG_80MHZ: 80 MHz was used
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001047 * @RX_VHT_FLAG_160MHZ: 160 MHz was used
Emmanuel Grumbachfb378c22014-03-04 10:35:25 +02001048 * @RX_VHT_FLAG_BF: packet was beamformed
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001049 */
1050enum mac80211_rx_vht_flags {
1051 RX_VHT_FLAG_80MHZ = BIT(0),
Johannes Bergf89903d2015-01-15 16:02:46 +01001052 RX_VHT_FLAG_160MHZ = BIT(1),
1053 RX_VHT_FLAG_BF = BIT(2),
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001054};
1055
1056/**
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001057 * struct ieee80211_rx_status - receive status
1058 *
1059 * The low-level driver should provide this information (the subset
1060 * supported by hardware) to the 802.11 code with each received
Johannes Bergf1d58c22009-06-17 13:13:00 +02001061 * frame, in the skb's control buffer (cb).
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001062 *
Bruno Randolfc132bec2008-02-18 11:20:51 +09001063 * @mactime: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization Function
1064 * (TSF) timer when the first data symbol (MPDU) arrived at the hardware.
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +02001065 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, mac80211 doesn't use
1066 * it but can store it and pass it back to the driver for synchronisation
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01001067 * @band: the active band when this frame was received
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001068 * @freq: frequency the radio was tuned to when receiving this frame, in MHz
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001069 * @signal: signal strength when receiving this frame, either in dBm, in dB or
1070 * unspecified depending on the hardware capabilities flags
1071 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_*
Felix Fietkauef0621e2013-04-22 16:29:31 +02001072 * @chains: bitmask of receive chains for which separate signal strength
1073 * values were filled.
1074 * @chain_signal: per-chain signal strength, in dBm (unlike @signal, doesn't
1075 * support dB or unspecified units)
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001076 * @antenna: antenna used
Jouni Malinen0fb8ca42008-12-12 14:38:33 +02001077 * @rate_idx: index of data rate into band's supported rates or MCS index if
Johannes Berg56146182012-11-09 15:07:02 +01001078 * HT or VHT is used (%RX_FLAG_HT/%RX_FLAG_VHT)
1079 * @vht_nss: number of streams (VHT only)
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001080 * @flag: %RX_FLAG_*
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001081 * @vht_flag: %RX_VHT_FLAG_*
Johannes Berg554891e2010-09-24 12:38:25 +02001082 * @rx_flags: internal RX flags for mac80211
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001083 * @ampdu_reference: A-MPDU reference number, must be a different value for
1084 * each A-MPDU but the same for each subframe within one A-MPDU
1085 * @ampdu_delimiter_crc: A-MPDU delimiter CRC
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001086 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001087struct ieee80211_rx_status {
1088 u64 mactime;
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +02001089 u32 device_timestamp;
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001090 u32 ampdu_reference;
1091 u32 flag;
Johannes Berg30f42292012-07-05 13:14:18 +02001092 u16 freq;
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001093 u8 vht_flag;
Johannes Berg30f42292012-07-05 13:14:18 +02001094 u8 rate_idx;
Johannes Berg56146182012-11-09 15:07:02 +01001095 u8 vht_nss;
Johannes Berg30f42292012-07-05 13:14:18 +02001096 u8 rx_flags;
1097 u8 band;
1098 u8 antenna;
1099 s8 signal;
Felix Fietkauef0621e2013-04-22 16:29:31 +02001100 u8 chains;
1101 s8 chain_signal[IEEE80211_MAX_CHAINS];
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001102 u8 ampdu_delimiter_crc;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001103};
1104
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001105/**
Johannes Berg1f7bba72014-11-06 22:56:36 +01001106 * struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap - vendor radiotap data information
1107 * @present: presence bitmap for this vendor namespace
1108 * (this could be extended in the future if any vendor needs more
1109 * bits, the radiotap spec does allow for that)
1110 * @align: radiotap vendor namespace alignment. This defines the needed
1111 * alignment for the @data field below, not for the vendor namespace
1112 * description itself (which has a fixed 2-byte alignment)
1113 * Must be a power of two, and be set to at least 1!
1114 * @oui: radiotap vendor namespace OUI
1115 * @subns: radiotap vendor sub namespace
1116 * @len: radiotap vendor sub namespace skip length, if alignment is done
1117 * then that's added to this, i.e. this is only the length of the
1118 * @data field.
1119 * @pad: number of bytes of padding after the @data, this exists so that
1120 * the skb data alignment can be preserved even if the data has odd
1121 * length
1122 * @data: the actual vendor namespace data
1123 *
1124 * This struct, including the vendor data, goes into the skb->data before
1125 * the 802.11 header. It's split up in mac80211 using the align/oui/subns
1126 * data.
1127 */
1128struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap {
1129 u32 present;
1130 u8 align;
1131 u8 oui[3];
1132 u8 subns;
1133 u8 pad;
1134 u16 len;
1135 u8 data[];
1136} __packed;
1137
1138/**
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001139 * enum ieee80211_conf_flags - configuration flags
1140 *
1141 * Flags to define PHY configuration options
1142 *
Johannes Berg0869aea2009-10-28 10:03:35 +01001143 * @IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR: there's a monitor interface present -- use this
1144 * to determine for example whether to calculate timestamps for packets
1145 * or not, do not use instead of filter flags!
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02001146 * @IEEE80211_CONF_PS: Enable 802.11 power save mode (managed mode only).
1147 * This is the power save mode defined by IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2,
1148 * meaning that the hardware still wakes up for beacons, is able to
1149 * transmit frames and receive the possible acknowledgment frames.
1150 * Not to be confused with hardware specific wakeup/sleep states,
1151 * driver is responsible for that. See the section "Powersave support"
1152 * for more.
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +02001153 * @IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE: The device is running, but idle; if the flag is set
1154 * the driver should be prepared to handle configuration requests but
1155 * may turn the device off as much as possible. Typically, this flag will
1156 * be set when an interface is set UP but not associated or scanning, but
1157 * it can also be unset in that case when monitor interfaces are active.
Felix Fietkau45521242010-07-28 02:40:49 +02001158 * @IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL: The device is currently not on its main
1159 * operating channel.
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001160 */
1161enum ieee80211_conf_flags {
Johannes Berg0869aea2009-10-28 10:03:35 +01001162 IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR = (1<<0),
Johannes Bergae5eb022008-10-14 16:58:37 +02001163 IEEE80211_CONF_PS = (1<<1),
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +02001164 IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE = (1<<2),
Felix Fietkau45521242010-07-28 02:40:49 +02001165 IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL = (1<<3),
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001166};
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001167
Johannes Berg7a5158e2008-10-08 10:59:33 +02001168
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001169/**
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001170 * enum ieee80211_conf_changed - denotes which configuration changed
1171 *
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001172 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL: the listen interval changed
Johannes Berg0869aea2009-10-28 10:03:35 +01001173 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR: the monitor flag changed
Johannes Berge255d5e2009-04-22 12:40:07 +02001174 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS: the PS flag or dynamic PS timeout changed
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001175 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER: the TX power changed
Johannes Berg47979382009-01-07 10:13:27 +01001176 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL: the channel/channel_type changed
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001177 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS: retry limits changed
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +02001178 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE: Idle flag changed
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001179 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS: Spatial multiplexing powersave mode changed
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +02001180 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1181 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001182 */
1183enum ieee80211_conf_changed {
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001184 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS = BIT(1),
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001185 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL = BIT(2),
Johannes Berg0869aea2009-10-28 10:03:35 +01001186 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR = BIT(3),
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001187 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS = BIT(4),
Johannes Berge255d5e2009-04-22 12:40:07 +02001188 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER = BIT(5),
1189 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(6),
1190 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +02001191 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE = BIT(8),
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001192};
1193
1194/**
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001195 * enum ieee80211_smps_mode - spatial multiplexing power save mode
1196 *
Kalle Valo9d173fc2010-01-14 13:09:14 +02001197 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC: automatic
1198 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF: off
1199 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC: static
1200 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC: dynamic
1201 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES: internal, don't use
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001202 */
1203enum ieee80211_smps_mode {
1204 IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC,
1205 IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF,
1206 IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC,
1207 IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC,
1208
1209 /* keep last */
1210 IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES,
1211};
1212
1213/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001214 * struct ieee80211_conf - configuration of the device
1215 *
1216 * This struct indicates how the driver shall configure the hardware.
1217 *
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001218 * @flags: configuration flags defined above
1219 *
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08001220 * @listen_interval: listen interval in units of beacon interval
Johannes Berg9ccebe62009-04-23 10:32:36 +02001221 * @max_sleep_period: the maximum number of beacon intervals to sleep for
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001222 * before checking the beacon for a TIM bit (managed mode only); this
1223 * value will be only achievable between DTIM frames, the hardware
1224 * needs to check for the multicast traffic bit in DTIM beacons.
1225 * This variable is valid only when the CONF_PS flag is set.
Johannes Berg56007a02010-01-26 14:19:52 +01001226 * @ps_dtim_period: The DTIM period of the AP we're connected to, for use
1227 * in power saving. Power saving will not be enabled until a beacon
1228 * has been received and the DTIM period is known.
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001229 * @dynamic_ps_timeout: The dynamic powersave timeout (in ms), see the
1230 * powersave documentation below. This variable is valid only when
1231 * the CONF_PS flag is set.
1232 *
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +02001233 * @power_level: requested transmit power (in dBm), backward compatibility
1234 * value only that is set to the minimum of all interfaces
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001235 *
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01001236 * @chandef: the channel definition to tune to
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +01001237 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001238 *
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001239 * @long_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "long" frame
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001240 * (a frame not RTS protected), called "dot11LongRetryLimit" in 802.11,
1241 * but actually means the number of transmissions not the number of retries
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001242 * @short_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "short"
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001243 * frame, called "dot11ShortRetryLimit" in 802.11, but actually means the
1244 * number of transmissions not the number of retries
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001245 *
1246 * @smps_mode: spatial multiplexing powersave mode; note that
1247 * %IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC is used when the device is not
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +02001248 * configured for an HT channel.
1249 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1250 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001251 */
1252struct ieee80211_conf {
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001253 u32 flags;
Juuso Oikarinenff616382010-06-09 09:51:52 +03001254 int power_level, dynamic_ps_timeout;
Johannes Berg9ccebe62009-04-23 10:32:36 +02001255 int max_sleep_period;
Ron Rindjunsky10816d42007-11-26 16:14:30 +02001256
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001257 u16 listen_interval;
Johannes Berg56007a02010-01-26 14:19:52 +01001258 u8 ps_dtim_period;
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001259
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001260 u8 long_frame_max_tx_count, short_frame_max_tx_count;
1261
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01001262 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +01001263 bool radar_enabled;
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001264 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001265};
1266
1267/**
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001268 * struct ieee80211_channel_switch - holds the channel switch data
1269 *
1270 * The information provided in this structure is required for channel switch
1271 * operation.
1272 *
1273 * @timestamp: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization
1274 * Function (TSF) timer when the frame containing the channel switch
1275 * announcement was received. This is simply the rx.mactime parameter
1276 * the driver passed into mac80211.
Luciano Coelho2ba45382014-10-08 09:48:35 +03001277 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, this is the
1278 * rx.device_timestamp parameter the driver passed to mac80211.
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001279 * @block_tx: Indicates whether transmission must be blocked before the
1280 * scheduled channel switch, as indicated by the AP.
Johannes Berg85220d72013-03-25 18:29:27 +01001281 * @chandef: the new channel to switch to
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001282 * @count: the number of TBTT's until the channel switch event
1283 */
1284struct ieee80211_channel_switch {
1285 u64 timestamp;
Luciano Coelho2ba45382014-10-08 09:48:35 +03001286 u32 device_timestamp;
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001287 bool block_tx;
Johannes Berg85220d72013-03-25 18:29:27 +01001288 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001289 u8 count;
1290};
1291
1292/**
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001293 * enum ieee80211_vif_flags - virtual interface flags
1294 *
1295 * @IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER: the device performs beacon filtering
1296 * on this virtual interface to avoid unnecessary CPU wakeups
Johannes Bergea086352012-01-19 09:29:58 +01001297 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI: the device can do connection quality
1298 * monitoring on this virtual interface -- i.e. it can monitor
1299 * connection quality related parameters, such as the RSSI level and
1300 * provide notifications if configured trigger levels are reached.
Johannes Berg848955c2014-11-11 12:48:42 +01001301 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD: The device can do U-APSD for this
1302 * interface. This flag should be set during interface addition,
1303 * but may be set/cleared as late as authentication to an AP. It is
1304 * only valid for managed/station mode interfaces.
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001305 */
1306enum ieee80211_vif_flags {
1307 IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER = BIT(0),
Johannes Bergea086352012-01-19 09:29:58 +01001308 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI = BIT(1),
Johannes Berg848955c2014-11-11 12:48:42 +01001309 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD = BIT(2),
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001310};
1311
1312/**
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001313 * struct ieee80211_vif - per-interface data
1314 *
1315 * Data in this structure is continually present for driver
1316 * use during the life of a virtual interface.
1317 *
Johannes Berg51fb61e2007-12-19 01:31:27 +01001318 * @type: type of this virtual interface
Johannes Bergbda39332008-10-11 01:51:51 +02001319 * @bss_conf: BSS configuration for this interface, either our own
1320 * or the BSS we're associated to
Johannes Berg47846c92009-11-25 17:46:19 +01001321 * @addr: address of this interface
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02001322 * @p2p: indicates whether this AP or STA interface is a p2p
1323 * interface, i.e. a GO or p2p-sta respectively
Michal Kazior59af6922014-04-09 15:10:59 +02001324 * @csa_active: marks whether a channel switch is going on. Internally it is
1325 * write-protected by sdata_lock and local->mtx so holding either is fine
1326 * for read access.
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001327 * @driver_flags: flags/capabilities the driver has for this interface,
1328 * these need to be set (or cleared) when the interface is added
1329 * or, if supported by the driver, the interface type is changed
1330 * at runtime, mac80211 will never touch this field
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001331 * @hw_queue: hardware queue for each AC
1332 * @cab_queue: content-after-beacon (DTIM beacon really) queue, AP mode only
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02001333 * @chanctx_conf: The channel context this interface is assigned to, or %NULL
1334 * when it is not assigned. This pointer is RCU-protected due to the TX
1335 * path needing to access it; even though the netdev carrier will always
1336 * be off when it is %NULL there can still be races and packets could be
1337 * processed after it switches back to %NULL.
Stanislaw Gruszkaddbfe862013-03-08 14:46:14 +01001338 * @debugfs_dir: debugfs dentry, can be used by drivers to create own per
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001339 * interface debug files. Note that it will be NULL for the virtual
Stanislaw Gruszkaddbfe862013-03-08 14:46:14 +01001340 * monitor interface (if that is requested.)
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001341 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
1342 * sizeof(void *).
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001343 * @txq: the multicast data TX queue (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction)
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001344 */
1345struct ieee80211_vif {
Johannes Berg05c914f2008-09-11 00:01:58 +02001346 enum nl80211_iftype type;
Johannes Bergbda39332008-10-11 01:51:51 +02001347 struct ieee80211_bss_conf bss_conf;
Johannes Berg47846c92009-11-25 17:46:19 +01001348 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN];
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02001349 bool p2p;
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02001350 bool csa_active;
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001351
1352 u8 cab_queue;
1353 u8 hw_queue[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS];
1354
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001355 struct ieee80211_txq *txq;
1356
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02001357 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf __rcu *chanctx_conf;
1358
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001359 u32 driver_flags;
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001360
Stanislaw Gruszkaddbfe862013-03-08 14:46:14 +01001361#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
1362 struct dentry *debugfs_dir;
1363#endif
1364
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001365 /* must be last */
Johannes Berg1c06ef92012-12-28 12:22:02 +01001366 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001367};
1368
Johannes Berg902acc72008-02-23 15:17:19 +01001369static inline bool ieee80211_vif_is_mesh(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
1370{
1371#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_MESH
Johannes Berg05c914f2008-09-11 00:01:58 +02001372 return vif->type == NL80211_IFTYPE_MESH_POINT;
Johannes Berg902acc72008-02-23 15:17:19 +01001373#endif
1374 return false;
1375}
1376
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001377/**
Johannes Bergad7e7182013-11-13 13:37:47 +01001378 * wdev_to_ieee80211_vif - return a vif struct from a wdev
1379 * @wdev: the wdev to get the vif for
1380 *
1381 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1382 * (like the vendor commands) that get a wdev.
1383 *
1384 * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't
1385 * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor
1386 * or AP_VLAN interfaces.)
1387 */
1388struct ieee80211_vif *wdev_to_ieee80211_vif(struct wireless_dev *wdev);
1389
1390/**
Emmanuel Grumbachdc5a1ad2015-03-12 08:53:24 +02001391 * ieee80211_vif_to_wdev - return a wdev struct from a vif
1392 * @vif: the vif to get the wdev for
1393 *
1394 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1395 * (like the vendor commands) that needs to get the wdev for a vif.
1396 *
1397 * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't
1398 * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor
1399 * or AP_VLAN interfaces.)
1400 */
1401struct wireless_dev *ieee80211_vif_to_wdev(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
1402
1403/**
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001404 * enum ieee80211_key_flags - key flags
1405 *
1406 * These flags are used for communication about keys between the driver
1407 * and mac80211, with the @flags parameter of &struct ieee80211_key_conf.
1408 *
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001409 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV: This flag should be set by the
1410 * driver to indicate that it requires IV generation for this
Ido Yarivdb128472015-01-06 08:39:02 -05001411 * particular key. Setting this flag does not necessarily mean that SKBs
1412 * will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or MIC.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001413 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC: This flag should be set by
1414 * the driver for a TKIP key if it requires Michael MIC
1415 * generation in software.
Ivo van Doornc6adbd22008-04-17 21:11:18 +02001416 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE: Set by mac80211, this flag indicates
1417 * that the key is pairwise rather then a shared key.
Johannes Berge548c492012-09-04 17:08:23 +02001418 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX: This flag should be set by the driver for a
Jouni Malinen00b9cfa2015-01-24 19:52:06 +02001419 * CCMP/GCMP key if it requires CCMP/GCMP encryption of management frames
1420 * (MFP) to be done in software.
Arik Nemtsov077a9152011-10-23 08:21:41 +02001421 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver
Janusz.Dziedzic@tieto.comee701082012-05-09 08:11:20 +03001422 * if space should be prepared for the IV, but the IV
Arik Nemtsov077a9152011-10-23 08:21:41 +02001423 * itself should not be generated. Do not set together with
Ido Yarivdb128472015-01-06 08:39:02 -05001424 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV on the same key. Setting this flag does
1425 * not necessarily mean that SKBs will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or
1426 * MIC.
Johannes Berge548c492012-09-04 17:08:23 +02001427 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT: This key will be used to decrypt received
1428 * management frames. The flag can help drivers that have a hardware
1429 * crypto implementation that doesn't deal with management frames
1430 * properly by allowing them to not upload the keys to hardware and
1431 * fall back to software crypto. Note that this flag deals only with
1432 * RX, if your crypto engine can't deal with TX you can also set the
1433 * %IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX flag to encrypt such frames in SW.
Marek Kwaczynski17d38fa2014-04-14 11:27:21 +02001434 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT: This flag should be set by the
Jouni Malinen00b9cfa2015-01-24 19:52:06 +02001435 * driver for a CCMP/GCMP key to indicate that is requires IV generation
Marek Kwaczynski17d38fa2014-04-14 11:27:21 +02001436 * only for managment frames (MFP).
Ido Yarivdb128472015-01-06 08:39:02 -05001437 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM: This flag should be set by the
1438 * driver for a key to indicate that sufficient tailroom must always
1439 * be reserved for ICV or MIC, even when HW encryption is enabled.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001440 */
1441enum ieee80211_key_flags {
Marek Kwaczynski17d38fa2014-04-14 11:27:21 +02001442 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT = BIT(0),
1443 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV = BIT(1),
1444 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC = BIT(2),
1445 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE = BIT(3),
1446 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX = BIT(4),
1447 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE = BIT(5),
1448 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT = BIT(6),
Ido Yarivdb128472015-01-06 08:39:02 -05001449 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001450};
1451
1452/**
1453 * struct ieee80211_key_conf - key information
1454 *
1455 * This key information is given by mac80211 to the driver by
1456 * the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops.
1457 *
1458 * @hw_key_idx: To be set by the driver, this is the key index the driver
1459 * wants to be given when a frame is transmitted and needs to be
Johannes Berg6a7664d2007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001460 * encrypted in hardware.
Johannes Berg97359d12010-08-10 09:46:38 +02001461 * @cipher: The key's cipher suite selector.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001462 * @flags: key flags, see &enum ieee80211_key_flags.
1463 * @keyidx: the key index (0-3)
1464 * @keylen: key material length
Luis R. Rodriguezffd78912008-06-21 10:02:46 -04001465 * @key: key material. For ALG_TKIP the key is encoded as a 256-bit (32 byte)
1466 * data block:
1467 * - Temporal Encryption Key (128 bits)
1468 * - Temporal Authenticator Tx MIC Key (64 bits)
1469 * - Temporal Authenticator Rx MIC Key (64 bits)
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01001470 * @icv_len: The ICV length for this key type
1471 * @iv_len: The IV length for this key type
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001472 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001473struct ieee80211_key_conf {
Johannes Berg97359d12010-08-10 09:46:38 +02001474 u32 cipher;
Felix Fietkau76708de2008-10-05 18:02:48 +02001475 u8 icv_len;
1476 u8 iv_len;
Johannes Berg6a7664d2007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001477 u8 hw_key_idx;
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001478 u8 flags;
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001479 s8 keyidx;
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001480 u8 keylen;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001481 u8 key[0];
1482};
1483
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001484/**
Max Stepanov2475b1cc2013-03-24 14:23:27 +02001485 * struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme - cipher scheme
1486 *
1487 * This structure contains a cipher scheme information defining
1488 * the secure packet crypto handling.
1489 *
1490 * @cipher: a cipher suite selector
1491 * @iftype: a cipher iftype bit mask indicating an allowed cipher usage
1492 * @hdr_len: a length of a security header used the cipher
1493 * @pn_len: a length of a packet number in the security header
1494 * @pn_off: an offset of pn from the beginning of the security header
1495 * @key_idx_off: an offset of key index byte in the security header
1496 * @key_idx_mask: a bit mask of key_idx bits
1497 * @key_idx_shift: a bit shift needed to get key_idx
1498 * key_idx value calculation:
1499 * (sec_header_base[key_idx_off] & key_idx_mask) >> key_idx_shift
1500 * @mic_len: a mic length in bytes
1501 */
1502struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme {
1503 u32 cipher;
1504 u16 iftype;
1505 u8 hdr_len;
1506 u8 pn_len;
1507 u8 pn_off;
1508 u8 key_idx_off;
1509 u8 key_idx_mask;
1510 u8 key_idx_shift;
1511 u8 mic_len;
1512};
1513
1514/**
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001515 * enum set_key_cmd - key command
1516 *
1517 * Used with the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
1518 * indicates whether a key is being removed or added.
1519 *
1520 * @SET_KEY: a key is set
1521 * @DISABLE_KEY: a key must be disabled
1522 */
Johannes Bergea49c352007-09-18 17:29:21 -04001523enum set_key_cmd {
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001524 SET_KEY, DISABLE_KEY,
Johannes Bergea49c352007-09-18 17:29:21 -04001525};
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001526
Tomas Winkler478f8d22007-09-30 13:52:37 +02001527/**
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01001528 * enum ieee80211_sta_state - station state
1529 *
1530 * @IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST: station doesn't exist at all,
1531 * this is a special state for add/remove transitions
1532 * @IEEE80211_STA_NONE: station exists without special state
1533 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTH: station is authenticated
1534 * @IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC: station is associated
1535 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED: station is authorized (802.1X)
1536 */
1537enum ieee80211_sta_state {
1538 /* NOTE: These need to be ordered correctly! */
1539 IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST,
1540 IEEE80211_STA_NONE,
1541 IEEE80211_STA_AUTH,
1542 IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC,
1543 IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED,
1544};
1545
1546/**
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01001547 * enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth - station RX bandwidth
1548 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20: station can only receive 20 MHz
1549 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40: station can receive up to 40 MHz
1550 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80: station can receive up to 80 MHz
1551 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160: station can receive up to 160 MHz
1552 * (including 80+80 MHz)
1553 *
1554 * Implementation note: 20 must be zero to be initialized
1555 * correctly, the values must be sorted.
1556 */
1557enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth {
1558 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20 = 0,
1559 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40,
1560 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80,
1561 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160,
1562};
1563
1564/**
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001565 * struct ieee80211_sta_rates - station rate selection table
1566 *
1567 * @rcu_head: RCU head used for freeing the table on update
Robert P. J. Day03f831a2013-05-02 07:15:09 -04001568 * @rate: transmit rates/flags to be used by default.
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001569 * Overriding entries per-packet is possible by using cb tx control.
1570 */
1571struct ieee80211_sta_rates {
1572 struct rcu_head rcu_head;
1573 struct {
1574 s8 idx;
1575 u8 count;
1576 u8 count_cts;
1577 u8 count_rts;
1578 u16 flags;
1579 } rate[IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE];
1580};
1581
1582/**
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001583 * struct ieee80211_sta - station table entry
1584 *
1585 * A station table entry represents a station we are possibly
1586 * communicating with. Since stations are RCU-managed in
1587 * mac80211, any ieee80211_sta pointer you get access to must
1588 * either be protected by rcu_read_lock() explicitly or implicitly,
1589 * or you must take good care to not use such a pointer after a
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01001590 * call to your sta_remove callback that removed it.
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001591 *
1592 * @addr: MAC address
1593 * @aid: AID we assigned to the station if we're an AP
Johannes Berg323ce792008-09-11 02:45:11 +02001594 * @supp_rates: Bitmap of supported rates (per band)
Johannes Berg55d942f2013-03-01 13:07:48 +01001595 * @ht_cap: HT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
1596 * @vht_cap: VHT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
Johannes Berg527871d2015-03-21 08:09:55 +01001597 * @wme: indicates whether the STA supports QoS/WME (if local devices does,
1598 * otherwise always false)
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001599 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
1600 * sizeof(void *), size is determined in hw information.
Eliad Peller910868d2011-09-11 09:46:55 +03001601 * @uapsd_queues: bitmap of queues configured for uapsd. Only valid
1602 * if wme is supported.
1603 * @max_sp: max Service Period. Only valid if wme is supported.
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01001604 * @bandwidth: current bandwidth the station can receive with
Johannes Berg8921d042012-12-27 18:26:42 +01001605 * @rx_nss: in HT/VHT, the maximum number of spatial streams the
1606 * station can receive at the moment, changed by operating mode
1607 * notifications and capabilities. The value is only valid after
1608 * the station moves to associated state.
Johannes Bergaf0ed692013-02-12 14:21:00 +01001609 * @smps_mode: current SMPS mode (off, static or dynamic)
Robert P. J. Day03f831a2013-05-02 07:15:09 -04001610 * @rates: rate control selection table
Arik Nemtsov0c4972c2014-05-01 10:17:27 +03001611 * @tdls: indicates whether the STA is a TDLS peer
Arik Nemtsov8b941482014-10-22 12:32:48 +03001612 * @tdls_initiator: indicates the STA is an initiator of the TDLS link. Only
1613 * valid if the STA is a TDLS peer in the first place.
SenthilKumar Jegadeesan64a8cef2015-03-02 13:29:40 +05301614 * @mfp: indicates whether the STA uses management frame protection or not.
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001615 * @txq: per-TID data TX queues (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction)
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001616 */
1617struct ieee80211_sta {
Johannes Berg881d9482009-01-21 15:13:48 +01001618 u32 supp_rates[IEEE80211_NUM_BANDS];
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001619 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN];
1620 u16 aid;
Johannes Bergd9fe60d2008-10-09 12:13:49 +02001621 struct ieee80211_sta_ht_cap ht_cap;
Mahesh Palivela818255e2012-10-10 11:33:04 +00001622 struct ieee80211_sta_vht_cap vht_cap;
Arik Nemtsov39df6002011-06-27 23:58:45 +03001623 bool wme;
Eliad Peller9533b4a2011-08-23 14:37:47 +03001624 u8 uapsd_queues;
1625 u8 max_sp;
Johannes Berg8921d042012-12-27 18:26:42 +01001626 u8 rx_nss;
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01001627 enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth bandwidth;
Johannes Bergaf0ed692013-02-12 14:21:00 +01001628 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001629 struct ieee80211_sta_rates __rcu *rates;
Arik Nemtsov0c4972c2014-05-01 10:17:27 +03001630 bool tdls;
Arik Nemtsov8b941482014-10-22 12:32:48 +03001631 bool tdls_initiator;
SenthilKumar Jegadeesan64a8cef2015-03-02 13:29:40 +05301632 bool mfp;
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001633
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001634 struct ieee80211_txq *txq[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS];
1635
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001636 /* must be last */
Johannes Berg1c06ef92012-12-28 12:22:02 +01001637 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001638};
1639
1640/**
Tomas Winkler478f8d22007-09-30 13:52:37 +02001641 * enum sta_notify_cmd - sta notify command
1642 *
1643 * Used with the sta_notify() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
Sujith38a6cc72010-05-19 11:32:30 +05301644 * indicates if an associated station made a power state transition.
Tomas Winkler478f8d22007-09-30 13:52:37 +02001645 *
Christian Lamparter4571d3b2008-11-30 00:48:41 +01001646 * @STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP: a station is now sleeping
1647 * @STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE: a sleeping station woke up
1648 */
Christian Lamparter89fad572008-12-09 16:28:06 +01001649enum sta_notify_cmd {
Christian Lamparter4571d3b2008-11-30 00:48:41 +01001650 STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP, STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE,
1651};
1652
1653/**
Thomas Huehn36323f82012-07-23 21:33:42 +02001654 * struct ieee80211_tx_control - TX control data
1655 *
1656 * @sta: station table entry, this sta pointer may be NULL and
1657 * it is not allowed to copy the pointer, due to RCU.
1658 */
1659struct ieee80211_tx_control {
1660 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
1661};
1662
1663/**
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001664 * struct ieee80211_txq - Software intermediate tx queue
1665 *
1666 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
1667 * @sta: station table entry, %NULL for per-vif queue
1668 * @tid: the TID for this queue (unused for per-vif queue)
1669 * @ac: the AC for this queue
Randy Dunlapff419b32015-04-26 20:13:34 -07001670 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
1671 * sizeof(void *).
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001672 *
1673 * The driver can obtain packets from this queue by calling
1674 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue().
1675 */
1676struct ieee80211_txq {
1677 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
1678 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
1679 u8 tid;
1680 u8 ac;
1681
1682 /* must be last */
1683 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
1684};
1685
1686/**
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001687 * enum ieee80211_hw_flags - hardware flags
1688 *
1689 * These flags are used to indicate hardware capabilities to
1690 * the stack. Generally, flags here should have their meaning
1691 * done in a way that the simplest hardware doesn't need setting
1692 * any particular flags. There are some exceptions to this rule,
1693 * however, so you are advised to review these flags carefully.
1694 *
Johannes Bergaf65cd962009-11-17 18:18:36 +01001695 * @IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL:
1696 * The hardware or firmware includes rate control, and cannot be
1697 * controlled by the stack. As such, no rate control algorithm
1698 * should be instantiated, and the TX rate reported to userspace
1699 * will be taken from the TX status instead of the rate control
1700 * algorithm.
1701 * Note that this requires that the driver implement a number of
1702 * callbacks so it has the correct information, it needs to have
1703 * the @set_rts_threshold callback and must look at the BSS config
1704 * @use_cts_prot for G/N protection, @use_short_slot for slot
1705 * timing in 2.4 GHz and @use_short_preamble for preambles for
1706 * CCK frames.
1707 *
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001708 * @IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS:
1709 * Indicates that received frames passed to the stack include
1710 * the FCS at the end.
1711 *
1712 * @IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING:
1713 * Some wireless LAN chipsets buffer broadcast/multicast frames
1714 * for power saving stations in the hardware/firmware and others
1715 * rely on the host system for such buffering. This option is used
1716 * to configure the IEEE 802.11 upper layer to buffer broadcast and
1717 * multicast frames when there are power saving stations so that
Luis R. Rodriguez546c80c92008-08-14 11:43:20 -07001718 * the driver can fetch them with ieee80211_get_buffered_bc().
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001719 *
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01001720 * @IEEE80211_HW_2GHZ_SHORT_SLOT_INCAPABLE:
1721 * Hardware is not capable of short slot operation on the 2.4 GHz band.
1722 *
1723 * @IEEE80211_HW_2GHZ_SHORT_PREAMBLE_INCAPABLE:
1724 * Hardware is not capable of receiving frames with short preamble on
1725 * the 2.4 GHz band.
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001726 *
1727 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC:
1728 * Hardware can provide signal values but we don't know its units. We
1729 * expect values between 0 and @max_signal.
1730 * If possible please provide dB or dBm instead.
1731 *
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001732 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM:
1733 * Hardware gives signal values in dBm, decibel difference from
1734 * one milliwatt. This is the preferred method since it is standardized
1735 * between different devices. @max_signal does not need to be set.
1736 *
Tomas Winkler06ff47b2008-06-18 17:53:44 +03001737 * @IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT:
1738 * Hardware supports spectrum management defined in 802.11h
1739 * Measurement, Channel Switch, Quieting, TPC
Sujith8b30b1f2008-10-24 09:55:27 +05301740 *
1741 * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION:
1742 * Hardware supports 11n A-MPDU aggregation.
Kalle Valo520eb822008-12-18 23:35:27 +02001743 *
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01001744 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS:
1745 * Hardware has power save support (i.e. can go to sleep).
1746 *
1747 * @IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK:
1748 * Hardware requires nullfunc frame handling in stack, implies
1749 * stack support for dynamic PS.
1750 *
1751 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS:
1752 * Hardware has support for dynamic PS.
Jouni Malinen4375d082009-01-08 13:32:11 +02001753 *
1754 * @IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE:
1755 * Hardware supports management frame protection (MFP, IEEE 802.11w).
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02001756 *
Vivek Natarajan375177b2010-02-09 14:50:28 +05301757 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS:
1758 * Hardware can provide ack status reports of Tx frames to
1759 * the stack.
1760 *
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02001761 * @IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR:
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001762 * The hardware performs its own connection monitoring, including
1763 * periodic keep-alives to the AP and probing the AP on beacon loss.
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02001764 *
Emmanuel Grumbachc65dd142012-12-12 10:12:24 +02001765 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC:
1766 * This device needs to get data from beacon before association (i.e.
1767 * dtim_period).
Johannes Berge31b8212010-10-05 19:39:30 +02001768 *
1769 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK: The device's crypto engine supports
1770 * per-station GTKs as used by IBSS RSN or during fast transition. If
1771 * the device doesn't support per-station GTKs, but can be asked not
1772 * to decrypt group addressed frames, then IBSS RSN support is still
1773 * possible but software crypto will be used. Advertise the wiphy flag
1774 * only in that case.
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02001775 *
1776 * @IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS: When operating in AP mode the device
1777 * autonomously manages the PS status of connected stations. When
1778 * this flag is set mac80211 will not trigger PS mode for connected
1779 * stations based on the PM bit of incoming frames.
1780 * Use ieee80211_start_ps()/ieee8021_end_ps() to manually configure
1781 * the PS mode of connected stations.
Arik Nemtsovedf6b782011-08-30 09:32:38 +03001782 *
1783 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW: The device handles TX A-MPDU session
1784 * setup strictly in HW. mac80211 should not attempt to do this in
1785 * software.
Eliad Peller885bd8e2012-02-02 17:44:55 +02001786 *
Johannes Berg4b6f1dd2012-04-03 14:35:57 +02001787 * @IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF: The driver would like to be informed of
1788 * a virtual monitor interface when monitor interfaces are the only
1789 * active interfaces.
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001790 *
Ben Greeare27513f2014-10-22 12:23:03 -07001791 * @IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF: The driver would like for no wlanX to
1792 * be created. It is expected user-space will create vifs as
1793 * desired (and thus have them named as desired).
1794 *
Johannes Bergfa7e1fb2015-01-22 18:44:19 +01001795 * @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL: The driver wants to control which of the
1796 * crypto algorithms can be done in software - so don't automatically
1797 * try to fall back to it if hardware crypto fails, but do so only if
1798 * the driver returns 1. This also forces the driver to advertise its
1799 * supported cipher suites.
1800 *
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001801 * @IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL: The driver wants to control per-interface
1802 * queue mapping in order to use different queues (not just one per AC)
1803 * for different virtual interfaces. See the doc section on HW queue
1804 * control for more details.
Johannes Berg6d711172012-06-19 17:19:44 +02001805 *
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001806 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE: The driver supports using a rate
1807 * selection table provided by the rate control algorithm.
1808 *
Johannes Berg6d711172012-06-19 17:19:44 +02001809 * @IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF: Use the P2P Device address for any
1810 * P2P Interface. This will be honoured even if more than one interface
1811 * is supported.
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +01001812 *
1813 * @IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY: Use sync timing from beacon frames
1814 * only, to allow getting TBTT of a DTIM beacon.
Arik Nemtsov7578d572013-09-01 17:15:51 +03001815 *
Johannes Berg919be622013-10-14 10:05:16 +02001816 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES: Hardware supports mixing HT/CCK rates
1817 * and can cope with CCK rates in an aggregation session (e.g. by not
1818 * using aggregation for such frames.)
1819 *
Arik Nemtsov7578d572013-09-01 17:15:51 +03001820 * @IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA: Support 802.11h based channel-switch (CSA)
1821 * for a single active channel while using channel contexts. When support
1822 * is not enabled the default action is to disconnect when getting the
1823 * CSA frame.
Luciano Coelho5d52ee82014-02-27 14:33:47 +02001824 *
Ido Yarivc70f59a2014-07-29 15:39:14 +03001825 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS: The driver will never modify the payload
1826 * or tailroom of TX skbs without copying them first.
1827 *
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +02001828 * @IEEE80211_SINGLE_HW_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS: The HW supports scanning on all bands
1829 * in one command, mac80211 doesn't have to run separate scans per band.
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001830 */
1831enum ieee80211_hw_flags {
Johannes Bergaf65cd962009-11-17 18:18:36 +01001832 IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL = 1<<0,
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001833 IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS = 1<<1,
1834 IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING = 1<<2,
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01001835 IEEE80211_HW_2GHZ_SHORT_SLOT_INCAPABLE = 1<<3,
1836 IEEE80211_HW_2GHZ_SHORT_PREAMBLE_INCAPABLE = 1<<4,
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001837 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC = 1<<5,
Johannes Berg7fee5372009-01-30 11:13:06 +01001838 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM = 1<<6,
Emmanuel Grumbachc65dd142012-12-12 10:12:24 +02001839 IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC = 1<<7,
Johannes Berg7fee5372009-01-30 11:13:06 +01001840 IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT = 1<<8,
1841 IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION = 1<<9,
1842 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS = 1<<10,
1843 IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK = 1<<11,
1844 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS = 1<<12,
1845 IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE = 1<<13,
Johannes Berg4b6f1dd2012-04-03 14:35:57 +02001846 IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF = 1<<14,
Ben Greeare27513f2014-10-22 12:23:03 -07001847 IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF = 1<<15,
Johannes Bergfa7e1fb2015-01-22 18:44:19 +01001848 IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL = 1<<16,
Johannes Berg848955c2014-11-11 12:48:42 +01001849 /* free slots */
Vivek Natarajan375177b2010-02-09 14:50:28 +05301850 IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS = 1<<18,
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02001851 IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR = 1<<19,
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001852 IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL = 1<<20,
Johannes Berge31b8212010-10-05 19:39:30 +02001853 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK = 1<<21,
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02001854 IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS = 1<<22,
Arik Nemtsovedf6b782011-08-30 09:32:38 +03001855 IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW = 1<<23,
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001856 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE = 1<<24,
Johannes Berg6d711172012-06-19 17:19:44 +02001857 IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF = 1<<25,
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +01001858 IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY = 1<<26,
Felix Fietkau2dfca312013-08-20 19:43:54 +02001859 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES = 1<<27,
Arik Nemtsov7578d572013-09-01 17:15:51 +03001860 IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA = 1<<28,
Ido Yarivc70f59a2014-07-29 15:39:14 +03001861 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS = 1<<29,
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +02001862 IEEE80211_SINGLE_HW_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS = 1<<30,
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001863};
1864
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001865/**
1866 * struct ieee80211_hw - hardware information and state
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001867 *
1868 * This structure contains the configuration and hardware
1869 * information for an 802.11 PHY.
1870 *
1871 * @wiphy: This points to the &struct wiphy allocated for this
1872 * 802.11 PHY. You must fill in the @perm_addr and @dev
1873 * members of this structure using SET_IEEE80211_DEV()
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01001874 * and SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(). Additionally, all supported
1875 * bands (with channels, bitrates) are registered here.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001876 *
1877 * @conf: &struct ieee80211_conf, device configuration, don't use.
1878 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001879 * @priv: pointer to private area that was allocated for driver use
1880 * along with this structure.
1881 *
1882 * @flags: hardware flags, see &enum ieee80211_hw_flags.
1883 *
1884 * @extra_tx_headroom: headroom to reserve in each transmit skb
1885 * for use by the driver (e.g. for transmit headers.)
1886 *
Felix Fietkau70dabeb2013-12-14 13:54:53 +01001887 * @extra_beacon_tailroom: tailroom to reserve in each beacon tx skb.
1888 * Can be used by drivers to add extra IEs.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001889 *
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001890 * @max_signal: Maximum value for signal (rssi) in RX information, used
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001891 * only when @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC or @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DB
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001892 *
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08001893 * @max_listen_interval: max listen interval in units of beacon interval
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001894 * that HW supports
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08001895 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001896 * @queues: number of available hardware transmit queues for
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +02001897 * data packets. WMM/QoS requires at least four, these
1898 * queues need to have configurable access parameters.
1899 *
Johannes Berg830f9032007-10-28 14:51:05 +01001900 * @rate_control_algorithm: rate control algorithm for this hardware.
1901 * If unset (NULL), the default algorithm will be used. Must be
1902 * set before calling ieee80211_register_hw().
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001903 *
1904 * @vif_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
1905 * within &struct ieee80211_vif.
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001906 * @sta_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
1907 * within &struct ieee80211_sta.
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02001908 * @chanctx_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
1909 * within &struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf.
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001910 * @txq_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
1911 * within @struct ieee80211_txq.
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +02001912 *
Helmut Schaa78be49e2010-10-02 11:31:55 +02001913 * @max_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages the hw
1914 * can handle.
1915 * @max_report_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages
1916 * the hw can report back.
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02001917 * @max_rate_tries: maximum number of tries for each stage
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04001918 *
Luciano Coelhodf6ba5d2011-01-12 15:26:30 +02001919 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximum buffer size (number of
1920 * sub-frames) to be used for A-MPDU block ack receiver
1921 * aggregation.
1922 * This is only relevant if the device has restrictions on the
1923 * number of subframes, if it relies on mac80211 to do reordering
1924 * it shouldn't be set.
Johannes Berg5dd36bc2011-01-18 13:52:23 +01001925 *
1926 * @max_tx_aggregation_subframes: maximum number of subframes in an
1927 * aggregate an HT driver will transmit, used by the peer as a
1928 * hint to size its reorder buffer.
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001929 *
1930 * @offchannel_tx_hw_queue: HW queue ID to use for offchannel TX
1931 * (if %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL is set)
Johannes Bergac55d2f2012-05-10 09:09:10 +02001932 *
1933 * @radiotap_mcs_details: lists which MCS information can the HW
1934 * reports, by default it is set to _MCS, _GI and _BW but doesn't
1935 * include _FMT. Use %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_* values, only
1936 * adding _BW is supported today.
Arik Nemtsov72d78722012-05-10 16:18:26 +03001937 *
Johannes Berg51648922012-11-22 23:00:18 +01001938 * @radiotap_vht_details: lists which VHT MCS information the HW reports,
1939 * the default is _GI | _BANDWIDTH.
1940 * Use the %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_VHT_KNOWN_* values.
1941 *
Arik Nemtsov72d78722012-05-10 16:18:26 +03001942 * @netdev_features: netdev features to be set in each netdev created
1943 * from this HW. Note only HW checksum features are currently
1944 * compatible with mac80211. Other feature bits will be rejected.
Alexander Bondar219c3862013-01-22 16:52:23 +02001945 *
1946 * @uapsd_queues: This bitmap is included in (re)association frame to indicate
1947 * for each access category if it is uAPSD trigger-enabled and delivery-
1948 * enabled. Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_* to set this bitmap.
1949 * Each bit corresponds to different AC. Value '1' in specific bit means
1950 * that corresponding AC is both trigger- and delivery-enabled. '0' means
1951 * neither enabled.
1952 *
1953 * @uapsd_max_sp_len: maximum number of total buffered frames the WMM AP may
1954 * deliver to a WMM STA during any Service Period triggered by the WMM STA.
1955 * Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_SP_* for correct values.
Max Stepanov2475b1cc2013-03-24 14:23:27 +02001956 *
1957 * @n_cipher_schemes: a size of an array of cipher schemes definitions.
1958 * @cipher_schemes: a pointer to an array of cipher scheme definitions
1959 * supported by HW.
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001960 *
1961 * @txq_ac_max_pending: maximum number of frames per AC pending in all txq
1962 * entries for a vif.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001963 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001964struct ieee80211_hw {
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001965 struct ieee80211_conf conf;
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001966 struct wiphy *wiphy;
Johannes Berg830f9032007-10-28 14:51:05 +01001967 const char *rate_control_algorithm;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001968 void *priv;
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001969 u32 flags;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001970 unsigned int extra_tx_headroom;
Felix Fietkau70dabeb2013-12-14 13:54:53 +01001971 unsigned int extra_beacon_tailroom;
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001972 int vif_data_size;
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001973 int sta_data_size;
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02001974 int chanctx_data_size;
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001975 int txq_data_size;
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08001976 u16 queues;
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08001977 u16 max_listen_interval;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001978 s8 max_signal;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02001979 u8 max_rates;
Helmut Schaa78be49e2010-10-02 11:31:55 +02001980 u8 max_report_rates;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02001981 u8 max_rate_tries;
Luciano Coelhodf6ba5d2011-01-12 15:26:30 +02001982 u8 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
Johannes Berg5dd36bc2011-01-18 13:52:23 +01001983 u8 max_tx_aggregation_subframes;
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001984 u8 offchannel_tx_hw_queue;
Johannes Bergac55d2f2012-05-10 09:09:10 +02001985 u8 radiotap_mcs_details;
Johannes Berg51648922012-11-22 23:00:18 +01001986 u16 radiotap_vht_details;
Arik Nemtsov72d78722012-05-10 16:18:26 +03001987 netdev_features_t netdev_features;
Alexander Bondar219c3862013-01-22 16:52:23 +02001988 u8 uapsd_queues;
1989 u8 uapsd_max_sp_len;
Max Stepanov2475b1cc2013-03-24 14:23:27 +02001990 u8 n_cipher_schemes;
1991 const struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme *cipher_schemes;
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001992 int txq_ac_max_pending;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001993};
1994
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001995/**
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +02001996 * struct ieee80211_scan_request - hw scan request
1997 *
1998 * @ies: pointers different parts of IEs (in req.ie)
1999 * @req: cfg80211 request.
2000 */
2001struct ieee80211_scan_request {
2002 struct ieee80211_scan_ies ies;
2003
2004 /* Keep last */
2005 struct cfg80211_scan_request req;
2006};
2007
2008/**
Arik Nemtsov8a4d32f2014-11-09 18:50:20 +02002009 * struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params - TDLS channel switch parameters
2010 *
2011 * @sta: peer this TDLS channel-switch request/response came from
2012 * @chandef: channel referenced in a TDLS channel-switch request
2013 * @action_code: see &enum ieee80211_tdls_actioncode
2014 * @status: channel-switch response status
2015 * @timestamp: time at which the frame was received
2016 * @switch_time: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
2017 * @switch_timeout: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
2018 * @tmpl_skb: TDLS switch-channel response template
2019 * @ch_sw_tm_ie: offset of the channel-switch timing IE inside @tmpl_skb
2020 */
2021struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params {
2022 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2023 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef;
2024 u8 action_code;
2025 u32 status;
2026 u32 timestamp;
2027 u16 switch_time;
2028 u16 switch_timeout;
2029 struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb;
2030 u32 ch_sw_tm_ie;
2031};
2032
2033/**
Luis R. Rodriguez9a953712009-01-22 15:05:53 -08002034 * wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw - return a mac80211 driver hw struct from a wiphy
2035 *
2036 * @wiphy: the &struct wiphy which we want to query
2037 *
2038 * mac80211 drivers can use this to get to their respective
2039 * &struct ieee80211_hw. Drivers wishing to get to their own private
2040 * structure can then access it via hw->priv. Note that mac802111 drivers should
2041 * not use wiphy_priv() to try to get their private driver structure as this
2042 * is already used internally by mac80211.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01002043 *
2044 * Return: The mac80211 driver hw struct of @wiphy.
Luis R. Rodriguez9a953712009-01-22 15:05:53 -08002045 */
2046struct ieee80211_hw *wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw(struct wiphy *wiphy);
2047
2048/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002049 * SET_IEEE80211_DEV - set device for 802.11 hardware
2050 *
2051 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the device for
2052 * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device
2053 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002054static inline void SET_IEEE80211_DEV(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct device *dev)
2055{
2056 set_wiphy_dev(hw->wiphy, dev);
2057}
2058
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002059/**
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -04002060 * SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR - set the permanent MAC address for 802.11 hardware
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002061 *
2062 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the MAC address for
2063 * @addr: the address to set
2064 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002065static inline void SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 *addr)
2066{
2067 memcpy(hw->wiphy->perm_addr, addr, ETH_ALEN);
2068}
2069
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002070static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2071ieee80211_get_tx_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02002072 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002073{
Larry Fingeraa331df2012-04-06 16:35:53 -05002074 if (WARN_ON_ONCE(c->control.rates[0].idx < 0))
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002075 return NULL;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002076 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[0].idx];
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002077}
2078
2079static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2080ieee80211_get_rts_cts_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02002081 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002082{
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02002083 if (c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx < 0)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002084 return NULL;
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02002085 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx];
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002086}
2087
2088static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2089ieee80211_get_alt_retry_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +02002090 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c, int idx)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002091{
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002092 if (c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx < 0)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002093 return NULL;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002094 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx];
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002095}
2096
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002097/**
Johannes Berg6096de72011-11-04 11:18:10 +01002098 * ieee80211_free_txskb - free TX skb
2099 * @hw: the hardware
2100 * @skb: the skb
2101 *
2102 * Free a transmit skb. Use this funtion when some failure
2103 * to transmit happened and thus status cannot be reported.
2104 */
2105void ieee80211_free_txskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
2106
2107/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002108 * DOC: Hardware crypto acceleration
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04002109 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002110 * mac80211 is capable of taking advantage of many hardware
2111 * acceleration designs for encryption and decryption operations.
2112 *
2113 * The set_key() callback in the &struct ieee80211_ops for a given
2114 * device is called to enable hardware acceleration of encryption and
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01002115 * decryption. The callback takes a @sta parameter that will be NULL
2116 * for default keys or keys used for transmission only, or point to
2117 * the station information for the peer for individual keys.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002118 * Multiple transmission keys with the same key index may be used when
2119 * VLANs are configured for an access point.
2120 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002121 * When transmitting, the TX control data will use the @hw_key_idx
2122 * selected by the driver by modifying the &struct ieee80211_key_conf
2123 * pointed to by the @key parameter to the set_key() function.
2124 *
2125 * The set_key() call for the %SET_KEY command should return 0 if
2126 * the key is now in use, -%EOPNOTSUPP or -%ENOSPC if it couldn't be
2127 * added; if you return 0 then hw_key_idx must be assigned to the
2128 * hardware key index, you are free to use the full u8 range.
2129 *
Johannes Bergfa7e1fb2015-01-22 18:44:19 +01002130 * Note that in the case that the @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL flag is
2131 * set, mac80211 will not automatically fall back to software crypto if
2132 * enabling hardware crypto failed. The set_key() call may also return the
2133 * value 1 to permit this specific key/algorithm to be done in software.
2134 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002135 * When the cmd is %DISABLE_KEY then it must succeed.
2136 *
2137 * Note that it is permissible to not decrypt a frame even if a key
2138 * for it has been uploaded to hardware, the stack will not make any
2139 * decision based on whether a key has been uploaded or not but rather
2140 * based on the receive flags.
2141 *
2142 * The &struct ieee80211_key_conf structure pointed to by the @key
2143 * parameter is guaranteed to be valid until another call to set_key()
2144 * removes it, but it can only be used as a cookie to differentiate
2145 * keys.
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002146 *
2147 * In TKIP some HW need to be provided a phase 1 key, for RX decryption
2148 * acceleration (i.e. iwlwifi). Those drivers should provide update_tkip_key
2149 * handler.
2150 * The update_tkip_key() call updates the driver with the new phase 1 key.
Lucas De Marchi25985ed2011-03-30 22:57:33 -03002151 * This happens every time the iv16 wraps around (every 65536 packets). The
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002152 * set_key() call will happen only once for each key (unless the AP did
2153 * rekeying), it will not include a valid phase 1 key. The valid phase 1 key is
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -04002154 * provided by update_tkip_key only. The trigger that makes mac80211 call this
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002155 * handler is software decryption with wrap around of iv16.
Yoni Divinskyde5fad82012-05-30 11:36:39 +03002156 *
2157 * The set_default_unicast_key() call updates the default WEP key index
2158 * configured to the hardware for WEP encryption type. This is required
2159 * for devices that support offload of data packets (e.g. ARP responses).
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04002160 */
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04002161
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002162/**
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002163 * DOC: Powersave support
2164 *
2165 * mac80211 has support for various powersave implementations.
2166 *
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002167 * First, it can support hardware that handles all powersaving by itself,
2168 * such hardware should simply set the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS hardware
2169 * flag. In that case, it will be told about the desired powersave mode
2170 * with the %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag depending on the association status.
2171 * The hardware must take care of sending nullfunc frames when necessary,
2172 * i.e. when entering and leaving powersave mode. The hardware is required
2173 * to look at the AID in beacons and signal to the AP that it woke up when
2174 * it finds traffic directed to it.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002175 *
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002176 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag enabled means that the powersave mode defined in
2177 * IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2 is enabled. This is not to be confused
2178 * with hardware wakeup and sleep states. Driver is responsible for waking
Bob Copeland2738bd62010-08-21 16:39:01 -04002179 * up the hardware before issuing commands to the hardware and putting it
2180 * back to sleep at appropriate times.
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002181 *
2182 * When PS is enabled, hardware needs to wakeup for beacons and receive the
2183 * buffered multicast/broadcast frames after the beacon. Also it must be
2184 * possible to send frames and receive the acknowledment frame.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002185 *
2186 * Other hardware designs cannot send nullfunc frames by themselves and also
2187 * need software support for parsing the TIM bitmap. This is also supported
2188 * by mac80211 by combining the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS and
2189 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK flags. The hardware is of course still
Johannes Berg955394c2009-04-16 17:04:25 +02002190 * required to pass up beacons. The hardware is still required to handle
2191 * waking up for multicast traffic; if it cannot the driver must handle that
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002192 * as best as it can, mac80211 is too slow to do that.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002193 *
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002194 * Dynamic powersave is an extension to normal powersave in which the
2195 * hardware stays awake for a user-specified period of time after sending a
2196 * frame so that reply frames need not be buffered and therefore delayed to
2197 * the next wakeup. It's compromise of getting good enough latency when
2198 * there's data traffic and still saving significantly power in idle
2199 * periods.
2200 *
Bob Copeland2738bd62010-08-21 16:39:01 -04002201 * Dynamic powersave is simply supported by mac80211 enabling and disabling
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002202 * PS based on traffic. Driver needs to only set %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS
2203 * flag and mac80211 will handle everything automatically. Additionally,
2204 * hardware having support for the dynamic PS feature may set the
2205 * %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS flag to indicate that it can support
2206 * dynamic PS mode itself. The driver needs to look at the
2207 * @dynamic_ps_timeout hardware configuration value and use it that value
2208 * whenever %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. In this case mac80211 will disable
2209 * dynamic PS feature in stack and will just keep %IEEE80211_CONF_PS
2210 * enabled whenever user has enabled powersave.
2211 *
2212 * Driver informs U-APSD client support by enabling
Johannes Berg848955c2014-11-11 12:48:42 +01002213 * %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD flag. The mode is configured through the
Masanari Iidae2278672014-02-18 22:54:36 +09002214 * uapsd parameter in conf_tx() operation. Hardware needs to send the QoS
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002215 * Nullfunc frames and stay awake until the service period has ended. To
2216 * utilize U-APSD, dynamic powersave is disabled for voip AC and all frames
2217 * from that AC are transmitted with powersave enabled.
2218 *
2219 * Note: U-APSD client mode is not yet supported with
2220 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002221 */
2222
2223/**
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02002224 * DOC: Beacon filter support
2225 *
2226 * Some hardware have beacon filter support to reduce host cpu wakeups
Justin P. Mattock42b2aa82011-11-28 20:31:00 -08002227 * which will reduce system power consumption. It usually works so that
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02002228 * the firmware creates a checksum of the beacon but omits all constantly
2229 * changing elements (TSF, TIM etc). Whenever the checksum changes the
2230 * beacon is forwarded to the host, otherwise it will be just dropped. That
2231 * way the host will only receive beacons where some relevant information
2232 * (for example ERP protection or WMM settings) have changed.
2233 *
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01002234 * Beacon filter support is advertised with the %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER
2235 * interface capability. The driver needs to enable beacon filter support
Johannes Berg955394c2009-04-16 17:04:25 +02002236 * whenever power save is enabled, that is %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. When
2237 * power save is enabled, the stack will not check for beacon loss and the
2238 * driver needs to notify about loss of beacons with ieee80211_beacon_loss().
2239 *
2240 * The time (or number of beacons missed) until the firmware notifies the
2241 * driver of a beacon loss event (which in turn causes the driver to call
2242 * ieee80211_beacon_loss()) should be configurable and will be controlled
2243 * by mac80211 and the roaming algorithm in the future.
2244 *
2245 * Since there may be constantly changing information elements that nothing
2246 * in the software stack cares about, we will, in the future, have mac80211
2247 * tell the driver which information elements are interesting in the sense
2248 * that we want to see changes in them. This will include
2249 * - a list of information element IDs
2250 * - a list of OUIs for the vendor information element
2251 *
2252 * Ideally, the hardware would filter out any beacons without changes in the
2253 * requested elements, but if it cannot support that it may, at the expense
2254 * of some efficiency, filter out only a subset. For example, if the device
2255 * doesn't support checking for OUIs it should pass up all changes in all
2256 * vendor information elements.
2257 *
2258 * Note that change, for the sake of simplification, also includes information
2259 * elements appearing or disappearing from the beacon.
2260 *
2261 * Some hardware supports an "ignore list" instead, just make sure nothing
2262 * that was requested is on the ignore list, and include commonly changing
2263 * information element IDs in the ignore list, for example 11 (BSS load) and
2264 * the various vendor-assigned IEs with unknown contents (128, 129, 133-136,
2265 * 149, 150, 155, 156, 173, 176, 178, 179, 219); for forward compatibility
2266 * it could also include some currently unused IDs.
2267 *
2268 *
2269 * In addition to these capabilities, hardware should support notifying the
2270 * host of changes in the beacon RSSI. This is relevant to implement roaming
2271 * when no traffic is flowing (when traffic is flowing we see the RSSI of
2272 * the received data packets). This can consist in notifying the host when
2273 * the RSSI changes significantly or when it drops below or rises above
2274 * configurable thresholds. In the future these thresholds will also be
2275 * configured by mac80211 (which gets them from userspace) to implement
2276 * them as the roaming algorithm requires.
2277 *
2278 * If the hardware cannot implement this, the driver should ask it to
2279 * periodically pass beacon frames to the host so that software can do the
2280 * signal strength threshold checking.
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02002281 */
2282
2283/**
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01002284 * DOC: Spatial multiplexing power save
2285 *
2286 * SMPS (Spatial multiplexing power save) is a mechanism to conserve
2287 * power in an 802.11n implementation. For details on the mechanism
2288 * and rationale, please refer to 802.11 (as amended by 802.11n-2009)
2289 * "11.2.3 SM power save".
2290 *
2291 * The mac80211 implementation is capable of sending action frames
2292 * to update the AP about the station's SMPS mode, and will instruct
2293 * the driver to enter the specific mode. It will also announce the
2294 * requested SMPS mode during the association handshake. Hardware
2295 * support for this feature is required, and can be indicated by
2296 * hardware flags.
2297 *
2298 * The default mode will be "automatic", which nl80211/cfg80211
2299 * defines to be dynamic SMPS in (regular) powersave, and SMPS
2300 * turned off otherwise.
2301 *
2302 * To support this feature, the driver must set the appropriate
2303 * hardware support flags, and handle the SMPS flag to the config()
2304 * operation. It will then with this mechanism be instructed to
2305 * enter the requested SMPS mode while associated to an HT AP.
2306 */
2307
2308/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002309 * DOC: Frame filtering
2310 *
2311 * mac80211 requires to see many management frames for proper
2312 * operation, and users may want to see many more frames when
2313 * in monitor mode. However, for best CPU usage and power consumption,
2314 * having as few frames as possible percolate through the stack is
2315 * desirable. Hence, the hardware should filter as much as possible.
2316 *
2317 * To achieve this, mac80211 uses filter flags (see below) to tell
2318 * the driver's configure_filter() function which frames should be
2319 * passed to mac80211 and which should be filtered out.
2320 *
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02002321 * Before configure_filter() is invoked, the prepare_multicast()
2322 * callback is invoked with the parameters @mc_count and @mc_list
2323 * for the combined multicast address list of all virtual interfaces.
2324 * It's use is optional, and it returns a u64 that is passed to
2325 * configure_filter(). Additionally, configure_filter() has the
2326 * arguments @changed_flags telling which flags were changed and
2327 * @total_flags with the new flag states.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002328 *
2329 * If your device has no multicast address filters your driver will
2330 * need to check both the %FIF_ALLMULTI flag and the @mc_count
2331 * parameter to see whether multicast frames should be accepted
2332 * or dropped.
2333 *
Michael Bueschd0f5afb2008-02-12 20:12:45 +01002334 * All unsupported flags in @total_flags must be cleared.
2335 * Hardware does not support a flag if it is incapable of _passing_
2336 * the frame to the stack. Otherwise the driver must ignore
2337 * the flag, but not clear it.
2338 * You must _only_ clear the flag (announce no support for the
2339 * flag to mac80211) if you are not able to pass the packet type
2340 * to the stack (so the hardware always filters it).
2341 * So for example, you should clear @FIF_CONTROL, if your hardware
2342 * always filters control frames. If your hardware always passes
2343 * control frames to the kernel and is incapable of filtering them,
2344 * you do _not_ clear the @FIF_CONTROL flag.
2345 * This rule applies to all other FIF flags as well.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002346 */
2347
2348/**
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002349 * DOC: AP support for powersaving clients
2350 *
2351 * In order to implement AP and P2P GO modes, mac80211 has support for
2352 * client powersaving, both "legacy" PS (PS-Poll/null data) and uAPSD.
2353 * There currently is no support for sAPSD.
2354 *
2355 * There is one assumption that mac80211 makes, namely that a client
2356 * will not poll with PS-Poll and trigger with uAPSD at the same time.
2357 * Both are supported, and both can be used by the same client, but
2358 * they can't be used concurrently by the same client. This simplifies
2359 * the driver code.
2360 *
2361 * The first thing to keep in mind is that there is a flag for complete
2362 * driver implementation: %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS. If this flag is set,
2363 * mac80211 expects the driver to handle most of the state machine for
2364 * powersaving clients and will ignore the PM bit in incoming frames.
2365 * Drivers then use ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() to inform mac80211 of
2366 * stations' powersave transitions. In this mode, mac80211 also doesn't
2367 * handle PS-Poll/uAPSD.
2368 *
2369 * In the mode without %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS, mac80211 will check the
2370 * PM bit in incoming frames for client powersave transitions. When a
2371 * station goes to sleep, we will stop transmitting to it. There is,
2372 * however, a race condition: a station might go to sleep while there is
2373 * data buffered on hardware queues. If the device has support for this
2374 * it will reject frames, and the driver should give the frames back to
2375 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED flag set which will
2376 * cause mac80211 to retry the frame when the station wakes up. The
2377 * driver is also notified of powersave transitions by calling its
2378 * @sta_notify callback.
2379 *
2380 * When the station is asleep, it has three choices: it can wake up,
2381 * it can PS-Poll, or it can possibly start a uAPSD service period.
2382 * Waking up is implemented by simply transmitting all buffered (and
2383 * filtered) frames to the station. This is the easiest case. When
2384 * the station sends a PS-Poll or a uAPSD trigger frame, mac80211
2385 * will inform the driver of this with the @allow_buffered_frames
2386 * callback; this callback is optional. mac80211 will then transmit
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +01002387 * the frames as usual and set the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002388 * on each frame. The last frame in the service period (or the only
2389 * response to a PS-Poll) also has %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set to
2390 * indicate that it ends the service period; as this frame must have
2391 * TX status report it also sets %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS.
2392 * When TX status is reported for this frame, the service period is
2393 * marked has having ended and a new one can be started by the peer.
2394 *
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +01002395 * Additionally, non-bufferable MMPDUs can also be transmitted by
2396 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER set in them.
2397 *
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002398 * Another race condition can happen on some devices like iwlwifi
2399 * when there are frames queued for the station and it wakes up
2400 * or polls; the frames that are already queued could end up being
2401 * transmitted first instead, causing reordering and/or wrong
2402 * processing of the EOSP. The cause is that allowing frames to be
2403 * transmitted to a certain station is out-of-band communication to
2404 * the device. To allow this problem to be solved, the driver can
2405 * call ieee80211_sta_block_awake() if frames are buffered when it
2406 * is notified that the station went to sleep. When all these frames
2407 * have been filtered (see above), it must call the function again
2408 * to indicate that the station is no longer blocked.
2409 *
2410 * If the driver buffers frames in the driver for aggregation in any
2411 * way, it must use the ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() call when it is
2412 * notified of the station going to sleep to inform mac80211 of any
2413 * TIDs that have frames buffered. Note that when a station wakes up
2414 * this information is reset (hence the requirement to call it when
2415 * informed of the station going to sleep). Then, when a service
2416 * period starts for any reason, @release_buffered_frames is called
2417 * with the number of frames to be released and which TIDs they are
2418 * to come from. In this case, the driver is responsible for setting
2419 * the EOSP (for uAPSD) and MORE_DATA bits in the released frames,
Masanari Iidae2278672014-02-18 22:54:36 +09002420 * to help the @more_data parameter is passed to tell the driver if
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002421 * there is more data on other TIDs -- the TIDs to release frames
2422 * from are ignored since mac80211 doesn't know how many frames the
2423 * buffers for those TIDs contain.
2424 *
2425 * If the driver also implement GO mode, where absence periods may
2426 * shorten service periods (or abort PS-Poll responses), it must
2427 * filter those response frames except in the case of frames that
2428 * are buffered in the driver -- those must remain buffered to avoid
2429 * reordering. Because it is possible that no frames are released
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01002430 * in this case, the driver must call ieee80211_sta_eosp()
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002431 * to indicate to mac80211 that the service period ended anyway.
2432 *
2433 * Finally, if frames from multiple TIDs are released from mac80211
2434 * but the driver might reorder them, it must clear & set the flags
2435 * appropriately (only the last frame may have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
2436 * and also take care of the EOSP and MORE_DATA bits in the frame.
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01002437 * The driver may also use ieee80211_sta_eosp() in this case.
Johannes Bergb77cf4f2014-01-09 00:00:38 +01002438 *
2439 * Note that if the driver ever buffers frames other than QoS-data
2440 * frames, it must take care to never send a non-QoS-data frame as
2441 * the last frame in a service period, adding a QoS-nulldata frame
2442 * after a non-QoS-data frame if needed.
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002443 */
2444
2445/**
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02002446 * DOC: HW queue control
2447 *
2448 * Before HW queue control was introduced, mac80211 only had a single static
2449 * assignment of per-interface AC software queues to hardware queues. This
2450 * was problematic for a few reasons:
2451 * 1) off-channel transmissions might get stuck behind other frames
2452 * 2) multiple virtual interfaces couldn't be handled correctly
2453 * 3) after-DTIM frames could get stuck behind other frames
2454 *
2455 * To solve this, hardware typically uses multiple different queues for all
2456 * the different usages, and this needs to be propagated into mac80211 so it
2457 * won't have the same problem with the software queues.
2458 *
2459 * Therefore, mac80211 now offers the %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL capability
2460 * flag that tells it that the driver implements its own queue control. To do
2461 * so, the driver will set up the various queues in each &struct ieee80211_vif
2462 * and the offchannel queue in &struct ieee80211_hw. In response, mac80211 will
2463 * use those queue IDs in the hw_queue field of &struct ieee80211_tx_info and
2464 * if necessary will queue the frame on the right software queue that mirrors
2465 * the hardware queue.
2466 * Additionally, the driver has to then use these HW queue IDs for the queue
2467 * management functions (ieee80211_stop_queue() et al.)
2468 *
2469 * The driver is free to set up the queue mappings as needed, multiple virtual
2470 * interfaces may map to the same hardware queues if needed. The setup has to
2471 * happen during add_interface or change_interface callbacks. For example, a
2472 * driver supporting station+station and station+AP modes might decide to have
2473 * 10 hardware queues to handle different scenarios:
2474 *
2475 * 4 AC HW queues for 1st vif: 0, 1, 2, 3
2476 * 4 AC HW queues for 2nd vif: 4, 5, 6, 7
2477 * after-DTIM queue for AP: 8
2478 * off-channel queue: 9
2479 *
2480 * It would then set up the hardware like this:
2481 * hw.offchannel_tx_hw_queue = 9
2482 *
2483 * and the first virtual interface that is added as follows:
2484 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VO] = 0
2485 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VI] = 1
2486 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BE] = 2
2487 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BK] = 3
2488 * vif.cab_queue = 8 // if AP mode, otherwise %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
2489 * and the second virtual interface with 4-7.
2490 *
2491 * If queue 6 gets full, for example, mac80211 would only stop the second
2492 * virtual interface's BE queue since virtual interface queues are per AC.
2493 *
2494 * Note that the vif.cab_queue value should be set to %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
2495 * whenever the queue is not used (i.e. the interface is not in AP mode) if the
2496 * queue could potentially be shared since mac80211 will look at cab_queue when
2497 * a queue is stopped/woken even if the interface is not in AP mode.
2498 */
2499
2500/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002501 * enum ieee80211_filter_flags - hardware filter flags
2502 *
2503 * These flags determine what the filter in hardware should be
2504 * programmed to let through and what should not be passed to the
2505 * stack. It is always safe to pass more frames than requested,
2506 * but this has negative impact on power consumption.
2507 *
2508 * @FIF_PROMISC_IN_BSS: promiscuous mode within your BSS,
2509 * think of the BSS as your network segment and then this corresponds
2510 * to the regular ethernet device promiscuous mode.
2511 *
2512 * @FIF_ALLMULTI: pass all multicast frames, this is used if requested
2513 * by the user or if the hardware is not capable of filtering by
2514 * multicast address.
2515 *
2516 * @FIF_FCSFAIL: pass frames with failed FCS (but you need to set the
2517 * %RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC for them)
2518 *
2519 * @FIF_PLCPFAIL: pass frames with failed PLCP CRC (but you need to set
2520 * the %RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC for them
2521 *
2522 * @FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC: This flag is set during scanning to indicate
2523 * to the hardware that it should not filter beacons or probe responses
2524 * by BSSID. Filtering them can greatly reduce the amount of processing
2525 * mac80211 needs to do and the amount of CPU wakeups, so you should
2526 * honour this flag if possible.
2527 *
Igor Perminove3b90ca2009-08-04 16:48:51 +04002528 * @FIF_CONTROL: pass control frames (except for PS Poll), if PROMISC_IN_BSS
Johannes Berg7be50862010-10-13 12:06:24 +02002529 * is not set then only those addressed to this station.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002530 *
2531 * @FIF_OTHER_BSS: pass frames destined to other BSSes
Igor Perminove3b90ca2009-08-04 16:48:51 +04002532 *
Johannes Berg7be50862010-10-13 12:06:24 +02002533 * @FIF_PSPOLL: pass PS Poll frames, if PROMISC_IN_BSS is not set then only
2534 * those addressed to this station.
2535 *
2536 * @FIF_PROBE_REQ: pass probe request frames
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002537 */
2538enum ieee80211_filter_flags {
2539 FIF_PROMISC_IN_BSS = 1<<0,
2540 FIF_ALLMULTI = 1<<1,
2541 FIF_FCSFAIL = 1<<2,
2542 FIF_PLCPFAIL = 1<<3,
2543 FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC = 1<<4,
2544 FIF_CONTROL = 1<<5,
2545 FIF_OTHER_BSS = 1<<6,
Igor Perminove3b90ca2009-08-04 16:48:51 +04002546 FIF_PSPOLL = 1<<7,
Johannes Berg7be50862010-10-13 12:06:24 +02002547 FIF_PROBE_REQ = 1<<8,
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002548};
2549
2550/**
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002551 * enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action - A-MPDU actions
2552 *
2553 * These flags are used with the ampdu_action() callback in
2554 * &struct ieee80211_ops to indicate which action is needed.
Johannes Berg827d42c2009-11-22 12:28:41 +01002555 *
2556 * Note that drivers MUST be able to deal with a TX aggregation
2557 * session being stopped even before they OK'ed starting it by
Johannes Berg5d22c892010-06-10 10:21:40 +02002558 * calling ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe, because the peer
Johannes Berg827d42c2009-11-22 12:28:41 +01002559 * might receive the addBA frame and send a delBA right away!
2560 *
Johannes Berg18b559d2012-07-18 13:51:25 +02002561 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START: start RX aggregation
2562 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP: stop RX aggregation
2563 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START: start TX aggregation
Johannes Bergb1720232009-03-23 17:28:39 +01002564 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL: TX aggregation has become operational
Johannes Berg18b559d2012-07-18 13:51:25 +02002565 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT: stop TX aggregation but continue transmitting
2566 * queued packets, now unaggregated. After all packets are transmitted the
2567 * driver has to call ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe().
2568 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH: stop TX aggregation and flush all packets,
2569 * called when the station is removed. There's no need or reason to call
2570 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() in this case as mac80211 assumes the
2571 * session is gone and removes the station.
2572 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT: called when TX aggregation is stopped
2573 * but the driver hasn't called ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() yet and
2574 * now the connection is dropped and the station will be removed. Drivers
2575 * should clean up and drop remaining packets when this is called.
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002576 */
2577enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action {
2578 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START,
2579 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP,
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02002580 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START,
Johannes Berg18b559d2012-07-18 13:51:25 +02002581 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT,
2582 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH,
2583 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT,
Johannes Bergb1720232009-03-23 17:28:39 +01002584 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL,
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002585};
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002586
2587/**
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002588 * enum ieee80211_frame_release_type - frame release reason
2589 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL: frame released for PS-Poll
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +02002590 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD: frame(s) released due to
2591 * frame received on trigger-enabled AC
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002592 */
2593enum ieee80211_frame_release_type {
2594 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL,
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +02002595 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD,
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002596};
2597
2598/**
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002599 * enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed - flags to indicate what changed
2600 *
2601 * @IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED: The bandwidth that can be used to transmit
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01002602 * to this station changed. The actual bandwidth is in the station
2603 * information -- for HT20/40 the IEEE80211_HT_CAP_SUP_WIDTH_20_40
2604 * flag changes, for HT and VHT the bandwidth field changes.
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002605 * @IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED: The SMPS state of the station changed.
Antonio Quartullie687f612012-08-12 18:24:55 +02002606 * @IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED: The supported rate set of this peer
2607 * changed (in IBSS mode) due to discovering more information about
2608 * the peer.
Johannes Berg0af83d32012-12-27 18:55:36 +01002609 * @IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED: N_SS (number of spatial streams) was changed
2610 * by the peer
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002611 */
2612enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed {
2613 IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED = BIT(0),
2614 IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED = BIT(1),
Antonio Quartullie687f612012-08-12 18:24:55 +02002615 IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED = BIT(2),
Johannes Berg0af83d32012-12-27 18:55:36 +01002616 IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED = BIT(3),
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002617};
2618
2619/**
Ilan Peerd339d5c2013-02-12 09:34:13 +02002620 * enum ieee80211_roc_type - remain on channel type
2621 *
2622 * With the support for multi channel contexts and multi channel operations,
2623 * remain on channel operations might be limited/deferred/aborted by other
2624 * flows/operations which have higher priority (and vise versa).
2625 * Specifying the ROC type can be used by devices to prioritize the ROC
2626 * operations compared to other operations/flows.
2627 *
2628 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL: There are no special requirements for this ROC.
2629 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX: The remain on channel request is required
2630 * for sending managment frames offchannel.
2631 */
2632enum ieee80211_roc_type {
2633 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL = 0,
2634 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX,
2635};
2636
2637/**
Eliad Pellercf2c92d2014-11-04 11:43:54 +02002638 * enum ieee80211_reconfig_complete_type - reconfig type
2639 *
2640 * This enum is used by the reconfig_complete() callback to indicate what
2641 * reconfiguration type was completed.
2642 *
2643 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART: hw restart type
2644 * (also due to resume() callback returning 1)
2645 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND: suspend type (regardless
2646 * of wowlan configuration)
2647 */
2648enum ieee80211_reconfig_type {
2649 IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART,
2650 IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND,
2651};
2652
2653/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002654 * struct ieee80211_ops - callbacks from mac80211 to the driver
2655 *
2656 * This structure contains various callbacks that the driver may
2657 * handle or, in some cases, must handle, for example to configure
2658 * the hardware to a new channel or to transmit a frame.
2659 *
2660 * @tx: Handler that 802.11 module calls for each transmitted frame.
2661 * skb contains the buffer starting from the IEEE 802.11 header.
2662 * The low-level driver should send the frame out based on
Johannes Bergeefce912008-05-17 00:57:13 +02002663 * configuration in the TX control data. This handler should,
Johannes Berg11127e92011-11-16 16:02:47 +01002664 * preferably, never fail and stop queues appropriately.
Johannes Berg11127e92011-11-16 16:02:47 +01002665 * Must be atomic.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002666 *
2667 * @start: Called before the first netdevice attached to the hardware
2668 * is enabled. This should turn on the hardware and must turn on
2669 * frame reception (for possibly enabled monitor interfaces.)
2670 * Returns negative error codes, these may be seen in userspace,
2671 * or zero.
2672 * When the device is started it should not have a MAC address
2673 * to avoid acknowledging frames before a non-monitor device
2674 * is added.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002675 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002676 *
2677 * @stop: Called after last netdevice attached to the hardware
2678 * is disabled. This should turn off the hardware (at least
2679 * it must turn off frame reception.)
2680 * May be called right after add_interface if that rejects
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -04002681 * an interface. If you added any work onto the mac80211 workqueue
2682 * you should ensure to cancel it on this callback.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002683 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002684 *
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02002685 * @suspend: Suspend the device; mac80211 itself will quiesce before and
2686 * stop transmitting and doing any other configuration, and then
2687 * ask the device to suspend. This is only invoked when WoWLAN is
2688 * configured, otherwise the device is deconfigured completely and
2689 * reconfigured at resume time.
Johannes Berg2b4562d2011-07-02 00:02:01 +02002690 * The driver may also impose special conditions under which it
2691 * wants to use the "normal" suspend (deconfigure), say if it only
2692 * supports WoWLAN when the device is associated. In this case, it
2693 * must return 1 from this function.
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02002694 *
2695 * @resume: If WoWLAN was configured, this indicates that mac80211 is
2696 * now resuming its operation, after this the device must be fully
2697 * functional again. If this returns an error, the only way out is
2698 * to also unregister the device. If it returns 1, then mac80211
2699 * will also go through the regular complete restart on resume.
2700 *
Johannes Bergd13e1412012-06-09 10:31:09 +02002701 * @set_wakeup: Enable or disable wakeup when WoWLAN configuration is
2702 * modified. The reason is that device_set_wakeup_enable() is
2703 * supposed to be called when the configuration changes, not only
2704 * in suspend().
2705 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002706 * @add_interface: Called when a netdevice attached to the hardware is
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -04002707 * enabled. Because it is not called for monitor mode devices, @start
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002708 * and @stop must be implemented.
2709 * The driver should perform any initialization it needs before
2710 * the device can be enabled. The initial configuration for the
2711 * interface is given in the conf parameter.
2712 * The callback may refuse to add an interface by returning a
2713 * negative error code (which will be seen in userspace.)
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002714 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002715 *
Johannes Berg34d4bc42010-08-27 12:35:58 +02002716 * @change_interface: Called when a netdevice changes type. This callback
2717 * is optional, but only if it is supported can interface types be
2718 * switched while the interface is UP. The callback may sleep.
2719 * Note that while an interface is being switched, it will not be
2720 * found by the interface iteration callbacks.
2721 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002722 * @remove_interface: Notifies a driver that an interface is going down.
2723 * The @stop callback is called after this if it is the last interface
2724 * and no monitor interfaces are present.
2725 * When all interfaces are removed, the MAC address in the hardware
2726 * must be cleared so the device no longer acknowledges packets,
2727 * the mac_addr member of the conf structure is, however, set to the
2728 * MAC address of the device going away.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002729 * Hence, this callback must be implemented. It can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002730 *
2731 * @config: Handler for configuration requests. IEEE 802.11 code calls this
2732 * function to change hardware configuration, e.g., channel.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002733 * This function should never fail but returns a negative error code
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002734 * if it does. The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002735 *
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +01002736 * @bss_info_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to BSS
2737 * parameters that may vary during BSS's lifespan, and may affect low
2738 * level driver (e.g. assoc/disassoc status, erp parameters).
2739 * This function should not be used if no BSS has been set, unless
2740 * for association indication. The @changed parameter indicates which
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002741 * of the bss parameters has changed when a call is made. The callback
2742 * can sleep.
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +01002743 *
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02002744 * @prepare_multicast: Prepare for multicast filter configuration.
2745 * This callback is optional, and its return value is passed
2746 * to configure_filter(). This callback must be atomic.
2747 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002748 * @configure_filter: Configure the device's RX filter.
2749 * See the section "Frame filtering" for more information.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002750 * This callback must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002751 *
Luis R. Rodriguez546c80c92008-08-14 11:43:20 -07002752 * @set_tim: Set TIM bit. mac80211 calls this function when a TIM bit
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02002753 * must be set or cleared for a given STA. Must be atomic.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002754 *
2755 * @set_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002756 * This callback is only called between add_interface and
2757 * remove_interface calls, i.e. while the given virtual interface
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01002758 * is enabled.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002759 * Returns a negative error code if the key can't be added.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002760 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002761 *
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002762 * @update_tkip_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
2763 * This callback will be called in the context of Rx. Called for drivers
2764 * which set IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_TKIP_REQ_RX_P1_KEY.
Kalle Valoeb807fb2010-01-24 14:55:12 +02002765 * The callback must be atomic.
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002766 *
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02002767 * @set_rekey_data: If the device supports GTK rekeying, for example while the
2768 * host is suspended, it can assign this callback to retrieve the data
2769 * necessary to do GTK rekeying, this is the KEK, KCK and replay counter.
2770 * After rekeying was done it should (for example during resume) notify
2771 * userspace of the new replay counter using ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify().
2772 *
Yoni Divinskyde5fad82012-05-30 11:36:39 +03002773 * @set_default_unicast_key: Set the default (unicast) key index, useful for
2774 * WEP when the device sends data packets autonomously, e.g. for ARP
2775 * offloading. The index can be 0-3, or -1 for unsetting it.
2776 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002777 * @hw_scan: Ask the hardware to service the scan request, no need to start
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01002778 * the scan state machine in stack. The scan must honour the channel
Kalle Valo9050bdd2009-03-22 21:57:21 +02002779 * configuration done by the regulatory agent in the wiphy's
2780 * registered bands. The hardware (or the driver) needs to make sure
Johannes Bergde95a542009-04-01 11:58:36 +02002781 * that power save is disabled.
2782 * The @req ie/ie_len members are rewritten by mac80211 to contain the
2783 * entire IEs after the SSID, so that drivers need not look at these
2784 * at all but just send them after the SSID -- mac80211 includes the
2785 * (extended) supported rates and HT information (where applicable).
2786 * When the scan finishes, ieee80211_scan_completed() must be called;
2787 * note that it also must be called when the scan cannot finish due to
2788 * any error unless this callback returned a negative error code.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002789 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002790 *
Eliad Pellerb8564392011-06-13 12:47:30 +03002791 * @cancel_hw_scan: Ask the low-level tp cancel the active hw scan.
2792 * The driver should ask the hardware to cancel the scan (if possible),
2793 * but the scan will be completed only after the driver will call
2794 * ieee80211_scan_completed().
2795 * This callback is needed for wowlan, to prevent enqueueing a new
2796 * scan_work after the low-level driver was already suspended.
2797 * The callback can sleep.
2798 *
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03002799 * @sched_scan_start: Ask the hardware to start scanning repeatedly at
2800 * specific intervals. The driver must call the
2801 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results() function whenever it finds results.
2802 * This process will continue until sched_scan_stop is called.
2803 *
2804 * @sched_scan_stop: Tell the hardware to stop an ongoing scheduled scan.
Johannes Berg37e33082014-02-17 10:48:17 +01002805 * In this case, ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped() must not be called.
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03002806 *
Michael Buesch80e775b2009-02-20 15:37:03 +01002807 * @sw_scan_start: Notifier function that is called just before a software scan
2808 * is started. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need this notification.
Johannes Berga344d672014-06-12 22:24:31 +02002809 * The mac_addr parameter allows supporting NL80211_SCAN_FLAG_RANDOM_ADDR,
2810 * the driver may set the NL80211_FEATURE_SCAN_RANDOM_MAC_ADDR flag if it
2811 * can use this parameter. The callback can sleep.
Michael Buesch80e775b2009-02-20 15:37:03 +01002812 *
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002813 * @sw_scan_complete: Notifier function that is called just after a
2814 * software scan finished. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need
2815 * this notification.
2816 * The callback can sleep.
Michael Buesch80e775b2009-02-20 15:37:03 +01002817 *
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002818 * @get_stats: Return low-level statistics.
2819 * Returns zero if statistics are available.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002820 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002821 *
Johannes Berg62da92f2007-12-19 02:03:31 +01002822 * @get_tkip_seq: If your device implements TKIP encryption in hardware this
2823 * callback should be provided to read the TKIP transmit IVs (both IV32
2824 * and IV16) for the given key from hardware.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002825 * The callback must be atomic.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002826 *
Arik Nemtsovf23a4782010-11-08 11:51:06 +02002827 * @set_frag_threshold: Configuration of fragmentation threshold. Assign this
2828 * if the device does fragmentation by itself; if this callback is
2829 * implemented then the stack will not do fragmentation.
2830 * The callback can sleep.
2831 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002832 * @set_rts_threshold: Configuration of RTS threshold (if device needs it)
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002833 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002834 *
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01002835 * @sta_add: Notifies low level driver about addition of an associated station,
2836 * AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. This callback can sleep.
2837 *
2838 * @sta_remove: Notifies low level driver about removal of an associated
Johannes Berg6a9d1b92013-12-04 22:39:17 +01002839 * station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. Note that after the callback
2840 * returns it isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected;
2841 * no RCU grace period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing
2842 * the station. See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
2843 * This callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01002844 *
Sujith Manoharan77d2ece2012-11-20 08:46:02 +05302845 * @sta_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add debugfs files
2846 * when a station is added to mac80211's station list. This callback
2847 * and @sta_remove_debugfs should be within a CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
2848 * conditional. This callback can sleep.
2849 *
2850 * @sta_remove_debugfs: Remove the debugfs files which were added using
2851 * @sta_add_debugfs. This callback can sleep.
2852 *
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01002853 * @sta_notify: Notifies low level driver about power state transition of an
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02002854 * associated station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. For a VIF operating
2855 * in AP mode, this callback will not be called when the flag
2856 * %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS is set. Must be atomic.
Christian Lamparter4571d3b2008-11-30 00:48:41 +01002857 *
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01002858 * @sta_state: Notifies low level driver about state transition of a
2859 * station (which can be the AP, a client, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc.)
2860 * This callback is mutually exclusive with @sta_add/@sta_remove.
2861 * It must not fail for down transitions but may fail for transitions
Johannes Berg6a9d1b92013-12-04 22:39:17 +01002862 * up the list of states. Also note that after the callback returns it
2863 * isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected - no RCU grace
2864 * period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing the station.
2865 * See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
2866 * The callback can sleep.
2867 *
2868 * @sta_pre_rcu_remove: Notify driver about station removal before RCU
2869 * synchronisation. This is useful if a driver needs to have station
2870 * pointers protected using RCU, it can then use this call to clear
2871 * the pointers instead of waiting for an RCU grace period to elapse
2872 * in @sta_state.
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01002873 * The callback can sleep.
2874 *
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002875 * @sta_rc_update: Notifies the driver of changes to the bitrates that can be
2876 * used to transmit to the station. The changes are advertised with bits
2877 * from &enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed and the values are reflected
2878 * in the station data. This callback should only be used when the driver
2879 * uses hardware rate control (%IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL) since
2880 * otherwise the rate control algorithm is notified directly.
2881 * Must be atomic.
Johannes Bergf815e2b2014-11-19 00:10:42 +01002882 * @sta_rate_tbl_update: Notifies the driver that the rate table changed. This
2883 * is only used if the configured rate control algorithm actually uses
2884 * the new rate table API, and is therefore optional. Must be atomic.
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002885 *
Johannes Berg2b9a7e12014-11-17 11:35:23 +01002886 * @sta_statistics: Get statistics for this station. For example with beacon
2887 * filtering, the statistics kept by mac80211 might not be accurate, so
2888 * let the driver pre-fill the statistics. The driver can fill most of
2889 * the values (indicating which by setting the filled bitmap), but not
2890 * all of them make sense - see the source for which ones are possible.
2891 * Statistics that the driver doesn't fill will be filled by mac80211.
2892 * The callback can sleep.
2893 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002894 * @conf_tx: Configure TX queue parameters (EDCF (aifs, cw_min, cw_max),
Johannes Bergfe3fa822008-09-08 11:05:09 +02002895 * bursting) for a hardware TX queue.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002896 * Returns a negative error code on failure.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002897 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002898 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002899 * @get_tsf: Get the current TSF timer value from firmware/hardware. Currently,
Alina Friedrichsen3b5d6652009-01-24 07:09:59 +01002900 * this is only used for IBSS mode BSSID merging and debugging. Is not a
Alina Friedrichsen7b08b3b2009-02-05 17:58:34 +01002901 * required function.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002902 * The callback can sleep.
Alina Friedrichsen3b5d6652009-01-24 07:09:59 +01002903 *
2904 * @set_tsf: Set the TSF timer to the specified value in the firmware/hardware.
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02002905 * Currently, this is only used for IBSS mode debugging. Is not a
Alina Friedrichsen7b08b3b2009-02-05 17:58:34 +01002906 * required function.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002907 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002908 *
2909 * @reset_tsf: Reset the TSF timer and allow firmware/hardware to synchronize
2910 * with other STAs in the IBSS. This is only used in IBSS mode. This
2911 * function is optional if the firmware/hardware takes full care of
2912 * TSF synchronization.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002913 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002914 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002915 * @tx_last_beacon: Determine whether the last IBSS beacon was sent by us.
2916 * This is needed only for IBSS mode and the result of this function is
2917 * used to determine whether to reply to Probe Requests.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002918 * Returns non-zero if this device sent the last beacon.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002919 * The callback can sleep.
Ron Rindjunskyd3c990f2007-11-26 16:14:34 +02002920 *
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002921 * @ampdu_action: Perform a certain A-MPDU action
2922 * The RA/TID combination determines the destination and TID we want
2923 * the ampdu action to be performed for. The action is defined through
2924 * ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action. Starting sequence number (@ssn)
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002925 * is the first frame we expect to perform the action on. Notice
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02002926 * that TX/RX_STOP can pass NULL for this parameter.
Johannes Berg0b01f032011-01-18 13:51:05 +01002927 * The @buf_size parameter is only valid when the action is set to
2928 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL and indicates the peer's reorder
Johannes Berg5312c3f2011-04-01 13:52:34 +02002929 * buffer size (number of subframes) for this session -- the driver
2930 * may neither send aggregates containing more subframes than this
2931 * nor send aggregates in a way that lost frames would exceed the
2932 * buffer size. If just limiting the aggregate size, this would be
2933 * possible with a buf_size of 8:
2934 * - TX: 1.....7
2935 * - RX: 2....7 (lost frame #1)
2936 * - TX: 8..1...
2937 * which is invalid since #1 was now re-transmitted well past the
2938 * buffer size of 8. Correct ways to retransmit #1 would be:
2939 * - TX: 1 or 18 or 81
2940 * Even "189" would be wrong since 1 could be lost again.
2941 *
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002942 * Returns a negative error code on failure.
Johannes Berg85ad1812010-06-10 10:21:49 +02002943 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg1f87f7d2009-06-02 13:01:41 +02002944 *
Randy Dunlap4e8998f2010-05-21 11:28:33 -07002945 * @get_survey: Return per-channel survey information
2946 *
Johannes Berg1f87f7d2009-06-02 13:01:41 +02002947 * @rfkill_poll: Poll rfkill hardware state. If you need this, you also
2948 * need to set wiphy->rfkill_poll to %true before registration,
2949 * and need to call wiphy_rfkill_set_hw_state() in the callback.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002950 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Bergaff89a92009-07-01 21:26:51 +02002951 *
Lukáš Turek310bc672009-12-21 22:50:48 +01002952 * @set_coverage_class: Set slot time for given coverage class as specified
2953 * in IEEE 802.11-2007 section 17.3.8.6 and modify ACK timeout
Lorenzo Bianconia4bcaf52014-09-04 23:57:41 +02002954 * accordingly; coverage class equals to -1 to enable ACK timeout
2955 * estimation algorithm (dynack). To disable dynack set valid value for
2956 * coverage class. This callback is not required and may sleep.
Lukáš Turek310bc672009-12-21 22:50:48 +01002957 *
David Spinadel52981cd2013-07-31 18:06:22 +03002958 * @testmode_cmd: Implement a cfg80211 test mode command. The passed @vif may
2959 * be %NULL. The callback can sleep.
Wey-Yi Guy71063f02011-05-20 09:05:54 -07002960 * @testmode_dump: Implement a cfg80211 test mode dump. The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berga80f7c02009-12-23 13:15:32 +01002961 *
2962 * @flush: Flush all pending frames from the hardware queue, making sure
Johannes Berg39ecc012013-02-13 12:11:00 +01002963 * that the hardware queues are empty. The @queues parameter is a bitmap
2964 * of queues to flush, which is useful if different virtual interfaces
2965 * use different hardware queues; it may also indicate all queues.
2966 * If the parameter @drop is set to %true, pending frames may be dropped.
Emmanuel Grumbach77be2c52014-03-27 11:30:29 +02002967 * Note that vif can be NULL.
Johannes Berg39ecc012013-02-13 12:11:00 +01002968 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02002969 *
2970 * @channel_switch: Drivers that need (or want) to offload the channel
2971 * switch operation for CSAs received from the AP may implement this
2972 * callback. They must then call ieee80211_chswitch_done() to indicate
2973 * completion of the channel switch.
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04002974 *
Bruno Randolf79b1c462010-11-24 14:34:41 +09002975 * @set_antenna: Set antenna configuration (tx_ant, rx_ant) on the device.
2976 * Parameters are bitmaps of allowed antennas to use for TX/RX. Drivers may
2977 * reject TX/RX mask combinations they cannot support by returning -EINVAL
2978 * (also see nl80211.h @NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_ANTENNA_TX).
2979 *
2980 * @get_antenna: Get current antenna configuration from device (tx_ant, rx_ant).
Johannes Berg4976b4e2011-01-04 13:02:32 +01002981 *
2982 * @remain_on_channel: Starts an off-channel period on the given channel, must
2983 * call back to ieee80211_ready_on_channel() when on that channel. Note
2984 * that normal channel traffic is not stopped as this is intended for hw
2985 * offload. Frames to transmit on the off-channel channel are transmitted
2986 * normally except for the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN flag. When the
2987 * duration (which will always be non-zero) expires, the driver must call
Johannes Berg196ac1c2012-06-05 14:28:40 +02002988 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired().
Johannes Berg196ac1c2012-06-05 14:28:40 +02002989 * Note that this callback may be called while the device is in IDLE and
2990 * must be accepted in this case.
2991 * This callback may sleep.
Johannes Berg4976b4e2011-01-04 13:02:32 +01002992 * @cancel_remain_on_channel: Requests that an ongoing off-channel period is
2993 * aborted before it expires. This callback may sleep.
John W. Linville38c09152011-03-07 16:19:18 -05002994 *
2995 * @set_ringparam: Set tx and rx ring sizes.
2996 *
2997 * @get_ringparam: Get tx and rx ring current and maximum sizes.
Vivek Natarajane8306f92011-04-06 11:41:10 +05302998 *
2999 * @tx_frames_pending: Check if there is any pending frame in the hardware
3000 * queues before entering power save.
Sujith Manoharanbdbfd6b2011-04-27 16:56:51 +05303001 *
3002 * @set_bitrate_mask: Set a mask of rates to be used for rate control selection
3003 * when transmitting a frame. Currently only legacy rates are handled.
3004 * The callback can sleep.
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +02003005 * @event_callback: Notify driver about any event in mac80211. See
3006 * &enum ieee80211_event_type for the different types.
3007 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003008 *
3009 * @release_buffered_frames: Release buffered frames according to the given
3010 * parameters. In the case where the driver buffers some frames for
3011 * sleeping stations mac80211 will use this callback to tell the driver
3012 * to release some frames, either for PS-poll or uAPSD.
Masanari Iidae2278672014-02-18 22:54:36 +09003013 * Note that if the @more_data parameter is %false the driver must check
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003014 * if there are more frames on the given TIDs, and if there are more than
3015 * the frames being released then it must still set the more-data bit in
3016 * the frame. If the @more_data parameter is %true, then of course the
3017 * more-data bit must always be set.
3018 * The @tids parameter tells the driver which TIDs to release frames
3019 * from, for PS-poll it will always have only a single bit set.
Johannes Bergdeeaee12011-09-29 16:04:35 +02003020 * In the case this is used for a PS-poll initiated release, the
3021 * @num_frames parameter will always be 1 so code can be shared. In
3022 * this case the driver must also set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
3023 * on the TX status (and must report TX status) so that the PS-poll
3024 * period is properly ended. This is used to avoid sending multiple
3025 * responses for a retried PS-poll frame.
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003026 * In the case this is used for uAPSD, the @num_frames parameter may be
3027 * bigger than one, but the driver may send fewer frames (it must send
3028 * at least one, however). In this case it is also responsible for
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +02003029 * setting the EOSP flag in the QoS header of the frames. Also, when the
3030 * service period ends, the driver must set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02003031 * on the last frame in the SP. Alternatively, it may call the function
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01003032 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() to inform mac80211 of the end of the SP.
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003033 * This callback must be atomic.
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02003034 * @allow_buffered_frames: Prepare device to allow the given number of frames
3035 * to go out to the given station. The frames will be sent by mac80211
3036 * via the usual TX path after this call. The TX information for frames
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +01003037 * released will also have the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER flag set
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02003038 * and the last one will also have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set. In case
3039 * frames from multiple TIDs are released and the driver might reorder
3040 * them between the TIDs, it must set the %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
3041 * on the last frame and clear it on all others and also handle the EOSP
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02003042 * bit in the QoS header correctly. Alternatively, it can also call the
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01003043 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() function.
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02003044 * The @tids parameter is a bitmap and tells the driver which TIDs the
3045 * frames will be on; it will at most have two bits set.
3046 * This callback must be atomic.
Ben Greeare3521142012-04-23 12:50:31 -07003047 *
3048 * @get_et_sset_count: Ethtool API to get string-set count.
3049 *
3050 * @get_et_stats: Ethtool API to get a set of u64 stats.
3051 *
3052 * @get_et_strings: Ethtool API to get a set of strings to describe stats
3053 * and perhaps other supported types of ethtool data-sets.
3054 *
Johannes Berga1845fc2012-06-27 13:18:36 +02003055 * @mgd_prepare_tx: Prepare for transmitting a management frame for association
3056 * before associated. In multi-channel scenarios, a virtual interface is
3057 * bound to a channel before it is associated, but as it isn't associated
3058 * yet it need not necessarily be given airtime, in particular since any
3059 * transmission to a P2P GO needs to be synchronized against the GO's
3060 * powersave state. mac80211 will call this function before transmitting a
3061 * management frame prior to having successfully associated to allow the
3062 * driver to give it channel time for the transmission, to get a response
3063 * and to be able to synchronize with the GO.
3064 * The callback will be called before each transmission and upon return
3065 * mac80211 will transmit the frame right away.
3066 * The callback is optional and can (should!) sleep.
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003067 *
Arik Nemtsovee10f2c2014-06-11 17:18:27 +03003068 * @mgd_protect_tdls_discover: Protect a TDLS discovery session. After sending
3069 * a TDLS discovery-request, we expect a reply to arrive on the AP's
3070 * channel. We must stay on the channel (no PSM, scan, etc.), since a TDLS
3071 * setup-response is a direct packet not buffered by the AP.
3072 * mac80211 will call this function just before the transmission of a TDLS
3073 * discovery-request. The recommended period of protection is at least
3074 * 2 * (DTIM period).
3075 * The callback is optional and can sleep.
3076 *
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003077 * @add_chanctx: Notifies device driver about new channel context creation.
3078 * @remove_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context destruction.
3079 * @change_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context changes that
3080 * may happen when combining different virtual interfaces on the same
3081 * channel context with different settings
3082 * @assign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being bound
3083 * to vif. Possible use is for hw queue remapping.
3084 * @unassign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being
3085 * unbound from vif.
Luciano Coelho1a5f0c12014-05-23 14:33:12 +03003086 * @switch_vif_chanctx: switch a number of vifs from one chanctx to
3087 * another, as specified in the list of
3088 * @ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch passed to the driver, according
3089 * to the mode defined in &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode.
3090 *
Johannes Berg10416382012-10-19 15:44:42 +02003091 * @start_ap: Start operation on the AP interface, this is called after all the
3092 * information in bss_conf is set and beacon can be retrieved. A channel
3093 * context is bound before this is called. Note that if the driver uses
3094 * software scan or ROC, this (and @stop_ap) isn't called when the AP is
3095 * just "paused" for scanning/ROC, which is indicated by the beacon being
3096 * disabled/enabled via @bss_info_changed.
3097 * @stop_ap: Stop operation on the AP interface.
Johannes Berg9214ad72012-11-06 19:18:13 +01003098 *
Eliad Pellercf2c92d2014-11-04 11:43:54 +02003099 * @reconfig_complete: Called after a call to ieee80211_restart_hw() and
3100 * during resume, when the reconfiguration has completed.
3101 * This can help the driver implement the reconfiguration step (and
3102 * indicate mac80211 is ready to receive frames).
3103 * This callback may sleep.
Johannes Berg8f21b0a2013-01-11 00:28:01 +01003104 *
Johannes Berga65240c2013-01-14 15:14:34 +01003105 * @ipv6_addr_change: IPv6 address assignment on the given interface changed.
3106 * Currently, this is only called for managed or P2P client interfaces.
3107 * This callback is optional; it must not sleep.
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003108 *
3109 * @channel_switch_beacon: Starts a channel switch to a new channel.
3110 * Beacons are modified to include CSA or ECSA IEs before calling this
3111 * function. The corresponding count fields in these IEs must be
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02003112 * decremented, and when they reach 1 the driver must call
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003113 * ieee80211_csa_finish(). Drivers which use ieee80211_beacon_get()
3114 * get the csa counter decremented by mac80211, but must check if it is
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02003115 * 1 using ieee80211_csa_is_complete() after the beacon has been
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003116 * transmitted and then call ieee80211_csa_finish().
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02003117 * If the CSA count starts as zero or 1, this function will not be called,
3118 * since there won't be any time to beacon before the switch anyway.
Luciano Coelho6d027bc2014-10-08 09:48:37 +03003119 * @pre_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3120 * before a channel switch procedure is started (ie. when a STA
3121 * gets a CSA or an userspace initiated channel-switch), allowing
3122 * the driver to prepare for the channel switch.
Luciano Coelhof1d65582014-10-08 09:48:38 +03003123 * @post_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3124 * after a channel switch procedure is completed, allowing the
3125 * driver to go back to a normal configuration.
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003126 *
Johannes Berg55fff502013-08-19 18:48:41 +02003127 * @join_ibss: Join an IBSS (on an IBSS interface); this is called after all
3128 * information in bss_conf is set up and the beacon can be retrieved. A
3129 * channel context is bound before this is called.
3130 * @leave_ibss: Leave the IBSS again.
Antonio Quartullicca674d2014-05-19 21:53:20 +02003131 *
3132 * @get_expected_throughput: extract the expected throughput towards the
3133 * specified station. The returned value is expressed in Kbps. It returns 0
3134 * if the RC algorithm does not have proper data to provide.
Felix Fietkau5b3dc422014-10-26 00:32:53 +02003135 *
3136 * @get_txpower: get current maximum tx power (in dBm) based on configuration
3137 * and hardware limits.
Arik Nemtsova7a6bdd2014-11-09 18:50:19 +02003138 *
3139 * @tdls_channel_switch: Start channel-switching with a TDLS peer. The driver
3140 * is responsible for continually initiating channel-switching operations
3141 * and returning to the base channel for communication with the AP. The
3142 * driver receives a channel-switch request template and the location of
3143 * the switch-timing IE within the template as part of the invocation.
3144 * The template is valid only within the call, and the driver can
3145 * optionally copy the skb for further re-use.
3146 * @tdls_cancel_channel_switch: Stop channel-switching with a TDLS peer. Both
3147 * peers must be on the base channel when the call completes.
Arik Nemtsov8a4d32f2014-11-09 18:50:20 +02003148 * @tdls_recv_channel_switch: a TDLS channel-switch related frame (request or
3149 * response) has been received from a remote peer. The driver gets
3150 * parameters parsed from the incoming frame and may use them to continue
3151 * an ongoing channel-switch operation. In addition, a channel-switch
3152 * response template is provided, together with the location of the
3153 * switch-timing IE within the template. The skb can only be used within
3154 * the function call.
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01003155 *
3156 * @wake_tx_queue: Called when new packets have been added to the queue.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003157 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003158struct ieee80211_ops {
Thomas Huehn36323f82012-07-23 21:33:42 +02003159 void (*tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3160 struct ieee80211_tx_control *control,
3161 struct sk_buff *skb);
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04003162 int (*start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04003163 void (*stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02003164#ifdef CONFIG_PM
3165 int (*suspend)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct cfg80211_wowlan *wowlan);
3166 int (*resume)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Berg6d525632012-04-04 15:05:25 +02003167 void (*set_wakeup)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, bool enabled);
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02003168#endif
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003169 int (*add_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003170 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berg34d4bc42010-08-27 12:35:58 +02003171 int (*change_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3172 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02003173 enum nl80211_iftype new_type, bool p2p);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003174 void (*remove_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003175 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02003176 int (*config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 changed);
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +01003177 void (*bss_info_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3178 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3179 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *info,
3180 u32 changed);
Johannes Bergb2abb6e2011-07-19 10:39:53 +02003181
Johannes Berg10416382012-10-19 15:44:42 +02003182 int (*start_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3183 void (*stop_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3184
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02003185 u64 (*prepare_multicast)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Jiri Pirko22bedad32010-04-01 21:22:57 +00003186 struct netdev_hw_addr_list *mc_list);
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04003187 void (*configure_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3188 unsigned int changed_flags,
3189 unsigned int *total_flags,
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02003190 u64 multicast);
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02003191 int (*set_tim)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3192 bool set);
Johannes Bergea49c352007-09-18 17:29:21 -04003193 int (*set_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, enum set_key_cmd cmd,
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01003194 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04003195 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key);
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02003196 void (*update_tkip_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Bergb3fbdcf2010-01-21 11:40:47 +01003197 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3198 struct ieee80211_key_conf *conf,
3199 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3200 u32 iv32, u16 *phase1key);
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02003201 void (*set_rekey_data)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3202 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3203 struct cfg80211_gtk_rekey_data *data);
Yoni Divinskyde5fad82012-05-30 11:36:39 +03003204 void (*set_default_unicast_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3205 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int idx);
Johannes Berga060bbf2010-04-27 11:59:34 +02003206 int (*hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +02003207 struct ieee80211_scan_request *req);
Eliad Pellerb8564392011-06-13 12:47:30 +03003208 void (*cancel_hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3209 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03003210 int (*sched_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3211 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3212 struct cfg80211_sched_scan_request *req,
David Spinadel633e2712014-02-06 16:15:23 +02003213 struct ieee80211_scan_ies *ies);
Johannes Berg37e33082014-02-17 10:48:17 +01003214 int (*sched_scan_stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03003215 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berga344d672014-06-12 22:24:31 +02003216 void (*sw_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3217 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3218 const u8 *mac_addr);
3219 void (*sw_scan_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3220 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003221 int (*get_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3222 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats *stats);
Johannes Berg62da92f2007-12-19 02:03:31 +01003223 void (*get_tkip_seq)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 hw_key_idx,
3224 u32 *iv32, u16 *iv16);
Arik Nemtsovf23a4782010-11-08 11:51:06 +02003225 int (*set_frag_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003226 int (*set_rts_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01003227 int (*sta_add)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3228 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3229 int (*sta_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3230 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Sujith Manoharan77d2ece2012-11-20 08:46:02 +05303231#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
3232 void (*sta_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3233 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3234 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3235 struct dentry *dir);
3236 void (*sta_remove_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3237 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3238 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3239 struct dentry *dir);
3240#endif
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01003241 void (*sta_notify)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02003242 enum sta_notify_cmd, struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01003243 int (*sta_state)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3244 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3245 enum ieee80211_sta_state old_state,
3246 enum ieee80211_sta_state new_state);
Johannes Berg6a9d1b92013-12-04 22:39:17 +01003247 void (*sta_pre_rcu_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3248 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3249 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02003250 void (*sta_rc_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3251 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3252 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3253 u32 changed);
Johannes Bergf815e2b2014-11-19 00:10:42 +01003254 void (*sta_rate_tbl_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3255 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3256 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Johannes Berg2b9a7e12014-11-17 11:35:23 +01003257 void (*sta_statistics)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3258 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3259 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3260 struct station_info *sinfo);
Eliad Peller8a3a3c82011-10-02 10:15:52 +02003261 int (*conf_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berga3304b02012-03-28 11:04:24 +02003262 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ac,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003263 const struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params *params);
Eliad Peller37a41b42011-09-21 14:06:11 +03003264 u64 (*get_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3265 void (*set_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3266 u64 tsf);
3267 void (*reset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003268 int (*tx_last_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02003269 int (*ampdu_action)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01003270 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02003271 enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action action,
Johannes Berg0b01f032011-01-18 13:51:05 +01003272 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid, u16 *ssn,
3273 u8 buf_size);
Holger Schurig12897232010-04-19 10:23:57 +02003274 int (*get_survey)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int idx,
3275 struct survey_info *survey);
Johannes Berg1f87f7d2009-06-02 13:01:41 +02003276 void (*rfkill_poll)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Lorenzo Bianconia4bcaf52014-09-04 23:57:41 +02003277 void (*set_coverage_class)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, s16 coverage_class);
Johannes Bergaff89a92009-07-01 21:26:51 +02003278#ifdef CONFIG_NL80211_TESTMODE
David Spinadel52981cd2013-07-31 18:06:22 +03003279 int (*testmode_cmd)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3280 void *data, int len);
Wey-Yi Guy71063f02011-05-20 09:05:54 -07003281 int (*testmode_dump)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb,
3282 struct netlink_callback *cb,
3283 void *data, int len);
Johannes Bergaff89a92009-07-01 21:26:51 +02003284#endif
Emmanuel Grumbach77be2c52014-03-27 11:30:29 +02003285 void (*flush)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3286 u32 queues, bool drop);
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02003287 void (*channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Luciano Coelho0f791eb42014-10-08 09:48:40 +03003288 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02003289 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
Bruno Randolf15d96752010-11-10 12:50:56 +09003290 int (*set_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx_ant, u32 rx_ant);
3291 int (*get_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 *tx_ant, u32 *rx_ant);
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01003292
3293 int (*remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Eliad Peller49884562012-11-19 17:05:09 +02003294 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01003295 struct ieee80211_channel *chan,
Ilan Peerd339d5c2013-02-12 09:34:13 +02003296 int duration,
3297 enum ieee80211_roc_type type);
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01003298 int (*cancel_remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
John W. Linville38c09152011-03-07 16:19:18 -05003299 int (*set_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx, u32 rx);
3300 void (*get_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3301 u32 *tx, u32 *tx_max, u32 *rx, u32 *rx_max);
Vivek Natarajane8306f92011-04-06 11:41:10 +05303302 bool (*tx_frames_pending)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Sujith Manoharanbdbfd6b2011-04-27 16:56:51 +05303303 int (*set_bitrate_mask)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3304 const struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask *mask);
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +02003305 void (*event_callback)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3306 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3307 const struct ieee80211_event *event);
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003308
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02003309 void (*allow_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3310 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3311 u16 tids, int num_frames,
3312 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
3313 bool more_data);
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003314 void (*release_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3315 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3316 u16 tids, int num_frames,
3317 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
3318 bool more_data);
Ben Greeare3521142012-04-23 12:50:31 -07003319
3320 int (*get_et_sset_count)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3321 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int sset);
3322 void (*get_et_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3323 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3324 struct ethtool_stats *stats, u64 *data);
3325 void (*get_et_strings)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3326 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3327 u32 sset, u8 *data);
Johannes Berga1845fc2012-06-27 13:18:36 +02003328
3329 void (*mgd_prepare_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3330 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003331
Arik Nemtsovee10f2c2014-06-11 17:18:27 +03003332 void (*mgd_protect_tdls_discover)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3333 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3334
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003335 int (*add_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3336 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3337 void (*remove_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3338 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3339 void (*change_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3340 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx,
3341 u32 changed);
3342 int (*assign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3343 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3344 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3345 void (*unassign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3346 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3347 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
Luciano Coelho1a5f0c12014-05-23 14:33:12 +03003348 int (*switch_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3349 struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch *vifs,
3350 int n_vifs,
3351 enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode mode);
Johannes Berg9214ad72012-11-06 19:18:13 +01003352
Eliad Pellercf2c92d2014-11-04 11:43:54 +02003353 void (*reconfig_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3354 enum ieee80211_reconfig_type reconfig_type);
Johannes Berga65240c2013-01-14 15:14:34 +01003355
3356#if IS_ENABLED(CONFIG_IPV6)
3357 void (*ipv6_addr_change)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3358 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3359 struct inet6_dev *idev);
3360#endif
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003361 void (*channel_switch_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3362 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3363 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef);
Luciano Coelho6d027bc2014-10-08 09:48:37 +03003364 int (*pre_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3365 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3366 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
Johannes Berg55fff502013-08-19 18:48:41 +02003367
Luciano Coelhof1d65582014-10-08 09:48:38 +03003368 int (*post_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3369 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3370
Johannes Berg55fff502013-08-19 18:48:41 +02003371 int (*join_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3372 void (*leave_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Antonio Quartullicca674d2014-05-19 21:53:20 +02003373 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Felix Fietkau5b3dc422014-10-26 00:32:53 +02003374 int (*get_txpower)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3375 int *dbm);
Arik Nemtsova7a6bdd2014-11-09 18:50:19 +02003376
3377 int (*tdls_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3378 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3379 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 oper_class,
3380 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
Arik Nemtsov8a4d32f2014-11-09 18:50:20 +02003381 struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb, u32 ch_sw_tm_ie);
Arik Nemtsova7a6bdd2014-11-09 18:50:19 +02003382 void (*tdls_cancel_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3383 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3384 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Arik Nemtsov8a4d32f2014-11-09 18:50:20 +02003385 void (*tdls_recv_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3386 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3387 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params *params);
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01003388
3389 void (*wake_tx_queue)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3390 struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003391};
3392
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003393/**
Ben Greearad287572014-10-22 12:23:01 -07003394 * ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm - Allocate a new hardware device
3395 *
3396 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
3397 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
3398 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
3399 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
3400 * @priv_data_len.
3401 *
3402 * @priv_data_len: length of private data
3403 * @ops: callbacks for this device
3404 * @requested_name: Requested name for this device.
3405 * NULL is valid value, and means use the default naming (phy%d)
3406 *
3407 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
3408 */
3409struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(size_t priv_data_len,
3410 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops,
3411 const char *requested_name);
3412
3413/**
3414 * ieee80211_alloc_hw - Allocate a new hardware device
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003415 *
3416 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
3417 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
3418 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
3419 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
3420 * @priv_data_len.
3421 *
3422 * @priv_data_len: length of private data
3423 * @ops: callbacks for this device
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003424 *
3425 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003426 */
Ben Greearad287572014-10-22 12:23:01 -07003427static inline
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003428struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw(size_t priv_data_len,
Ben Greearad287572014-10-22 12:23:01 -07003429 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops)
3430{
3431 return ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(priv_data_len, ops, NULL);
3432}
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003433
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003434/**
3435 * ieee80211_register_hw - Register hardware device
3436 *
Johannes Bergdbbea672008-02-26 14:34:06 +01003437 * You must call this function before any other functions in
3438 * mac80211. Note that before a hardware can be registered, you
3439 * need to fill the contained wiphy's information.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003440 *
3441 * @hw: the device to register as returned by ieee80211_alloc_hw()
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003442 *
3443 * Return: 0 on success. An error code otherwise.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003444 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003445int ieee80211_register_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3446
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003447/**
3448 * struct ieee80211_tpt_blink - throughput blink description
3449 * @throughput: throughput in Kbit/sec
3450 * @blink_time: blink time in milliseconds
3451 * (full cycle, ie. one off + one on period)
3452 */
3453struct ieee80211_tpt_blink {
3454 int throughput;
3455 int blink_time;
3456};
3457
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003458/**
3459 * enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags - throughput trigger flags
3460 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO: enable blinking with radio
3461 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK: enable blinking when working
3462 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED: enable blinking when at least one
3463 * interface is connected in some way, including being an AP
3464 */
3465enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags {
3466 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO = BIT(0),
3467 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK = BIT(1),
3468 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED = BIT(2),
3469};
3470
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003471#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
Joe Perches10dd9b72013-07-31 17:31:37 -07003472char *__ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3473char *__ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3474char *__ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3475char *__ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3476char *__ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3477 unsigned int flags,
3478 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
3479 unsigned int blink_table_len);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003480#endif
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003481/**
3482 * ieee80211_get_tx_led_name - get name of TX LED
3483 *
3484 * mac80211 creates a transmit LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3485 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3486 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3487 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3488 *
3489 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003490 *
3491 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003492 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003493static inline char *ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
3494{
3495#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3496 return __ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(hw);
3497#else
3498 return NULL;
3499#endif
3500}
3501
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003502/**
3503 * ieee80211_get_rx_led_name - get name of RX LED
3504 *
3505 * mac80211 creates a receive LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3506 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3507 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3508 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3509 *
3510 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003511 *
3512 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003513 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003514static inline char *ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
3515{
3516#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3517 return __ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(hw);
3518#else
3519 return NULL;
3520#endif
3521}
3522
Ivo van Doorncdcb0062008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003523/**
3524 * ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name - get name of association LED
3525 *
3526 * mac80211 creates a association LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3527 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3528 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3529 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3530 *
3531 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003532 *
3533 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Ivo van Doorncdcb0062008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003534 */
Michael Buesch47f0c502007-09-27 15:10:44 +02003535static inline char *ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
3536{
3537#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3538 return __ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(hw);
3539#else
3540 return NULL;
3541#endif
3542}
3543
Ivo van Doorncdcb0062008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003544/**
3545 * ieee80211_get_radio_led_name - get name of radio LED
3546 *
3547 * mac80211 creates a radio change LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3548 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3549 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3550 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3551 *
3552 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003553 *
3554 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Ivo van Doorncdcb0062008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003555 */
3556static inline char *ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
3557{
3558#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3559 return __ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(hw);
3560#else
3561 return NULL;
3562#endif
3563}
Michael Buesch47f0c502007-09-27 15:10:44 +02003564
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003565/**
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003566 * ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger - create throughput LED trigger
3567 * @hw: the hardware to create the trigger for
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003568 * @flags: trigger flags, see &enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003569 * @blink_table: the blink table -- needs to be ordered by throughput
3570 * @blink_table_len: size of the blink table
3571 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003572 * Return: %NULL (in case of error, or if no LED triggers are
3573 * configured) or the name of the new trigger.
3574 *
3575 * Note: This function must be called before ieee80211_register_hw().
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003576 */
3577static inline char *
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003578ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, unsigned int flags,
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003579 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
3580 unsigned int blink_table_len)
3581{
3582#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003583 return __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(hw, flags, blink_table,
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003584 blink_table_len);
3585#else
3586 return NULL;
3587#endif
3588}
3589
3590/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003591 * ieee80211_unregister_hw - Unregister a hardware device
3592 *
3593 * This function instructs mac80211 to free allocated resources
3594 * and unregister netdevices from the networking subsystem.
3595 *
3596 * @hw: the hardware to unregister
3597 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003598void ieee80211_unregister_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3599
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003600/**
3601 * ieee80211_free_hw - free hardware descriptor
3602 *
3603 * This function frees everything that was allocated, including the
3604 * private data for the driver. You must call ieee80211_unregister_hw()
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -07003605 * before calling this function.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003606 *
3607 * @hw: the hardware to free
3608 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003609void ieee80211_free_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3610
Johannes Bergf2753dd2009-04-14 10:09:24 +02003611/**
3612 * ieee80211_restart_hw - restart hardware completely
3613 *
3614 * Call this function when the hardware was restarted for some reason
3615 * (hardware error, ...) and the driver is unable to restore its state
3616 * by itself. mac80211 assumes that at this point the driver/hardware
3617 * is completely uninitialised and stopped, it starts the process by
3618 * calling the ->start() operation. The driver will need to reset all
3619 * internal state that it has prior to calling this function.
3620 *
3621 * @hw: the hardware to restart
3622 */
3623void ieee80211_restart_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3624
Johannes Berg06d181a2014-02-04 20:51:09 +01003625/**
3626 * ieee80211_napi_add - initialize mac80211 NAPI context
3627 * @hw: the hardware to initialize the NAPI context on
3628 * @napi: the NAPI context to initialize
3629 * @napi_dev: dummy NAPI netdevice, here to not waste the space if the
3630 * driver doesn't use NAPI
3631 * @poll: poll function
3632 * @weight: default weight
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04003633 *
Johannes Berg06d181a2014-02-04 20:51:09 +01003634 * See also netif_napi_add().
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04003635 */
Johannes Berg06d181a2014-02-04 20:51:09 +01003636void ieee80211_napi_add(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct napi_struct *napi,
3637 struct net_device *napi_dev,
3638 int (*poll)(struct napi_struct *, int),
3639 int weight);
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04003640
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003641/**
3642 * ieee80211_rx - receive frame
3643 *
3644 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
Zhu Yie3cf8b32010-03-29 17:35:07 +08003645 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
3646 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
3647 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
3648 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003649 *
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003650 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003651 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
3652 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02003653 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
3654 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003655 *
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003656 * In process context use instead ieee80211_rx_ni().
Johannes Bergd20ef632009-10-11 15:10:40 +02003657 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003658 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
3659 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003660 */
John W. Linville103bf9f2009-08-20 16:34:15 -04003661void ieee80211_rx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003662
3663/**
3664 * ieee80211_rx_irqsafe - receive frame
3665 *
3666 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in IRQ context
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003667 * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
3668 *
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003669 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni() may not
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02003670 * be mixed for a single hardware.Must not run concurrently with
3671 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003672 *
3673 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
3674 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003675 */
Johannes Bergf1d58c22009-06-17 13:13:00 +02003676void ieee80211_rx_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003677
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003678/**
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003679 * ieee80211_rx_ni - receive frame (in process context)
3680 *
3681 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in process context
3682 * (internally disables bottom halves).
3683 *
3684 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02003685 * not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
3686 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003687 *
3688 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
3689 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
3690 */
3691static inline void ieee80211_rx_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3692 struct sk_buff *skb)
3693{
3694 local_bh_disable();
3695 ieee80211_rx(hw, skb);
3696 local_bh_enable();
3697}
3698
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02003699/**
3700 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition - PS transition for connected sta
3701 *
3702 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS
3703 * flag set, use this function to inform mac80211 about a connected station
3704 * entering/leaving PS mode.
3705 *
3706 * This function may not be called in IRQ context or with softirqs enabled.
3707 *
3708 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized against
3709 * each other.
3710 *
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02003711 * @sta: currently connected sta
3712 * @start: start or stop PS
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003713 *
3714 * Return: 0 on success. -EINVAL when the requested PS mode is already set.
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02003715 */
3716int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool start);
3717
3718/**
3719 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni - PS transition for connected sta
3720 * (in process context)
3721 *
3722 * Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() but can be called in process context
3723 * (internally disables bottom halves). Concurrent call restriction still
3724 * applies.
3725 *
3726 * @sta: currently connected sta
3727 * @start: start or stop PS
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003728 *
3729 * Return: Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition().
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02003730 */
3731static inline int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3732 bool start)
3733{
3734 int ret;
3735
3736 local_bh_disable();
3737 ret = ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(sta, start);
3738 local_bh_enable();
3739
3740 return ret;
3741}
3742
Gertjan van Wingerded24deb22009-12-04 23:46:54 +01003743/*
3744 * The TX headroom reserved by mac80211 for its own tx_status functions.
3745 * This is enough for the radiotap header.
3746 */
Helmut Schaa7f2a5e22011-10-11 18:08:55 +02003747#define IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_HEADROOM 14
Gertjan van Wingerded24deb22009-12-04 23:46:54 +01003748
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003749/**
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02003750 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered - inform mac80211 about driver-buffered frames
Randy Dunlapbdfbe802011-05-22 17:22:45 -07003751 * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer for the sleeping station
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02003752 * @tid: the TID that has buffered frames
3753 * @buffered: indicates whether or not frames are buffered for this TID
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02003754 *
3755 * If a driver buffers frames for a powersave station instead of passing
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02003756 * them back to mac80211 for retransmission, the station may still need
3757 * to be told that there are buffered frames via the TIM bit.
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02003758 *
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02003759 * This function informs mac80211 whether or not there are frames that are
3760 * buffered in the driver for a given TID; mac80211 can then use this data
3761 * to set the TIM bit (NOTE: This may call back into the driver's set_tim
3762 * call! Beware of the locking!)
3763 *
3764 * If all frames are released to the station (due to PS-poll or uAPSD)
3765 * then the driver needs to inform mac80211 that there no longer are
3766 * frames buffered. However, when the station wakes up mac80211 assumes
3767 * that all buffered frames will be transmitted and clears this data,
3768 * drivers need to make sure they inform mac80211 about all buffered
3769 * frames on the sleep transition (sta_notify() with %STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP).
3770 *
3771 * Note that technically mac80211 only needs to know this per AC, not per
3772 * TID, but since driver buffering will inevitably happen per TID (since
3773 * it is related to aggregation) it is easier to make mac80211 map the
3774 * TID to the AC as required instead of keeping track in all drivers that
3775 * use this API.
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02003776 */
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02003777void ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3778 u8 tid, bool buffered);
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02003779
3780/**
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02003781 * ieee80211_get_tx_rates - get the selected transmit rates for a packet
3782 *
3783 * Call this function in a driver with per-packet rate selection support
3784 * to combine the rate info in the packet tx info with the most recent
3785 * rate selection table for the station entry.
3786 *
3787 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3788 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent.
3789 * @skb: the frame to be transmitted.
3790 * @dest: buffer for extracted rate/retry information
3791 * @max_rates: maximum number of rates to fetch
3792 */
3793void ieee80211_get_tx_rates(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3794 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3795 struct sk_buff *skb,
3796 struct ieee80211_tx_rate *dest,
3797 int max_rates);
3798
3799/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003800 * ieee80211_tx_status - transmit status callback
3801 *
3802 * Call this function for all transmitted frames after they have been
3803 * transmitted. It is permissible to not call this function for
3804 * multicast frames but this can affect statistics.
3805 *
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003806 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
3807 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls
Johannes Stezenbach20ed3162010-11-30 16:49:23 +01003808 * to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe()
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02003809 * may not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
3810 * ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni().
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003811 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003812 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
3813 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003814 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003815void ieee80211_tx_status(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003816 struct sk_buff *skb);
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003817
3818/**
Felix Fietkauf027c2a2014-11-19 20:08:13 +01003819 * ieee80211_tx_status_noskb - transmit status callback without skb
3820 *
3821 * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status
3822 * in drivers that cannot reliably map tx status information back to
3823 * specific skbs.
3824 *
3825 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized
3826 * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni()
3827 * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
3828 *
3829 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
3830 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent
3831 * (NULL for multicast packets)
3832 * @info: tx status information
3833 */
3834void ieee80211_tx_status_noskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3835 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3836 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info);
3837
3838/**
Johannes Stezenbach20ed3162010-11-30 16:49:23 +01003839 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni - transmit status callback (in process context)
3840 *
3841 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in process context.
3842 *
3843 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
3844 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed
3845 * for a single hardware.
3846 *
3847 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
3848 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
3849 */
3850static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3851 struct sk_buff *skb)
3852{
3853 local_bh_disable();
3854 ieee80211_tx_status(hw, skb);
3855 local_bh_enable();
3856}
3857
3858/**
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -07003859 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe - IRQ-safe transmit status callback
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003860 *
3861 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in IRQ context
3862 * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
3863 *
Johannes Stezenbach20ed3162010-11-30 16:49:23 +01003864 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
3865 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003866 *
3867 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
3868 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003869 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003870void ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003871 struct sk_buff *skb);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003872
3873/**
Arik Nemtsov8178d382011-04-18 14:22:28 +03003874 * ieee80211_report_low_ack - report non-responding station
3875 *
3876 * When operating in AP-mode, call this function to report a non-responding
3877 * connected STA.
3878 *
3879 * @sta: the non-responding connected sta
3880 * @num_packets: number of packets sent to @sta without a response
3881 */
3882void ieee80211_report_low_ack(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u32 num_packets);
3883
Andrei Otcheretianski1af586c2014-05-09 14:11:50 +03003884#define IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM 2
3885
Arik Nemtsov8178d382011-04-18 14:22:28 +03003886/**
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03003887 * struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets - mutable beacon offsets
3888 * @tim_offset: position of TIM element
3889 * @tim_length: size of TIM element
Luciano Coelho8d77ec82014-05-15 20:32:08 +03003890 * @csa_counter_offs: array of IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM offsets
3891 * to CSA counters. This array can contain zero values which
3892 * should be ignored.
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03003893 */
3894struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets {
3895 u16 tim_offset;
3896 u16 tim_length;
Andrei Otcheretianski1af586c2014-05-09 14:11:50 +03003897
3898 u16 csa_counter_offs[IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM];
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03003899};
3900
3901/**
3902 * ieee80211_beacon_get_template - beacon template generation function
3903 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
3904 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3905 * @offs: &struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets pointer to struct that will
3906 * receive the offsets that may be updated by the driver.
3907 *
3908 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
3909 * obtain the beacon template.
3910 *
3911 * This function should be used if the beacon frames are generated by the
3912 * device, and then the driver must use the returned beacon as the template
Andrei Otcheretianski1af586c2014-05-09 14:11:50 +03003913 * The driver or the device are responsible to update the DTIM and, when
3914 * applicable, the CSA count.
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03003915 *
3916 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
3917 *
3918 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
3919 */
3920struct sk_buff *
3921ieee80211_beacon_get_template(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3922 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3923 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets *offs);
3924
3925/**
Johannes Bergeddcbb92009-10-29 08:30:35 +01003926 * ieee80211_beacon_get_tim - beacon generation function
3927 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003928 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Johannes Bergeddcbb92009-10-29 08:30:35 +01003929 * @tim_offset: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE offset.
3930 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
3931 * @tim_length: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE length,
3932 * (including the ID and length bytes!).
3933 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
3934 *
3935 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03003936 * obtain the beacon frame.
Johannes Bergeddcbb92009-10-29 08:30:35 +01003937 *
3938 * If the beacon frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
3939 * hardware/firmware), the driver uses this function to get each beacon
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03003940 * frame from mac80211 -- it is responsible for calling this function exactly
3941 * once before the beacon is needed (e.g. based on hardware interrupt).
Johannes Bergeddcbb92009-10-29 08:30:35 +01003942 *
3943 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003944 *
3945 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
Johannes Bergeddcbb92009-10-29 08:30:35 +01003946 */
3947struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3948 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3949 u16 *tim_offset, u16 *tim_length);
3950
3951/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003952 * ieee80211_beacon_get - beacon generation function
3953 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003954 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003955 *
Johannes Bergeddcbb92009-10-29 08:30:35 +01003956 * See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003957 *
3958 * Return: See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003959 */
Johannes Bergeddcbb92009-10-29 08:30:35 +01003960static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3961 struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
3962{
3963 return ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(hw, vif, NULL, NULL);
3964}
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003965
3966/**
Andrei Otcheretianski1af586c2014-05-09 14:11:50 +03003967 * ieee80211_csa_update_counter - request mac80211 to decrement the csa counter
3968 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3969 *
3970 * The csa counter should be updated after each beacon transmission.
3971 * This function is called implicitly when
3972 * ieee80211_beacon_get/ieee80211_beacon_get_tim are called, however if the
3973 * beacon frames are generated by the device, the driver should call this
3974 * function after each beacon transmission to sync mac80211's csa counters.
3975 *
3976 * Return: new csa counter value
3977 */
3978u8 ieee80211_csa_update_counter(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3979
3980/**
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003981 * ieee80211_csa_finish - notify mac80211 about channel switch
3982 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3983 *
3984 * After a channel switch announcement was scheduled and the counter in this
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02003985 * announcement hits 1, this function must be called by the driver to
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003986 * notify mac80211 that the channel can be changed.
3987 */
3988void ieee80211_csa_finish(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3989
3990/**
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02003991 * ieee80211_csa_is_complete - find out if counters reached 1
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003992 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3993 *
3994 * This function returns whether the channel switch counters reached zero.
3995 */
3996bool ieee80211_csa_is_complete(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3997
3998
3999/**
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +02004000 * ieee80211_proberesp_get - retrieve a Probe Response template
4001 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4002 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4003 *
4004 * Creates a Probe Response template which can, for example, be uploaded to
4005 * hardware. The destination address should be set by the caller.
4006 *
4007 * Can only be called in AP mode.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004008 *
4009 * Return: The Probe Response template. %NULL on error.
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +02004010 */
4011struct sk_buff *ieee80211_proberesp_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4012 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4013
4014/**
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02004015 * ieee80211_pspoll_get - retrieve a PS Poll template
4016 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4017 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4018 *
4019 * Creates a PS Poll a template which can, for example, uploaded to
4020 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
4021 * AID, BSSID and MAC address is used.
4022 *
4023 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
4024 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004025 *
4026 * Return: The PS Poll template. %NULL on error.
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02004027 */
4028struct sk_buff *ieee80211_pspoll_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4029 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4030
4031/**
4032 * ieee80211_nullfunc_get - retrieve a nullfunc template
4033 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4034 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4035 *
4036 * Creates a Nullfunc template which can, for example, uploaded to
4037 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
4038 * BSSID and address is used.
4039 *
4040 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
4041 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit as well as Duration and Sequence Control fields.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004042 *
4043 * Return: The nullfunc template. %NULL on error.
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02004044 */
4045struct sk_buff *ieee80211_nullfunc_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4046 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4047
4048/**
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004049 * ieee80211_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
4050 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berga344d672014-06-12 22:24:31 +02004051 * @src_addr: source MAC address
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004052 * @ssid: SSID buffer
4053 * @ssid_len: length of SSID
Johannes Bergb9a9ada2012-11-29 13:00:10 +01004054 * @tailroom: tailroom to reserve at end of SKB for IEs
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004055 *
4056 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
4057 * hardware.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004058 *
4059 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004060 */
4061struct sk_buff *ieee80211_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berga344d672014-06-12 22:24:31 +02004062 const u8 *src_addr,
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004063 const u8 *ssid, size_t ssid_len,
Johannes Bergb9a9ada2012-11-29 13:00:10 +01004064 size_t tailroom);
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004065
4066/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004067 * ieee80211_rts_get - RTS frame generation function
4068 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004069 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004070 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
4071 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004072 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004073 * @rts: The buffer where to store the RTS frame.
4074 *
4075 * If the RTS frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4076 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4077 * the next RTS frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
4078 * for calling this function before and RTS frame is needed.
4079 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004080void ieee80211_rts_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004081 const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004082 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004083 struct ieee80211_rts *rts);
4084
4085/**
4086 * ieee80211_rts_duration - Get the duration field for an RTS frame
4087 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004088 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004089 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004090 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004091 *
4092 * If the RTS is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
4093 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4094 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004095 *
4096 * Return: The duration.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004097 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004098__le16 ieee80211_rts_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4099 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004100 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004101
4102/**
4103 * ieee80211_ctstoself_get - CTS-to-self frame generation function
4104 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004105 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004106 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
4107 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004108 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004109 * @cts: The buffer where to store the CTS-to-self frame.
4110 *
4111 * If the CTS-to-self frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4112 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4113 * the next CTS-to-self frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
4114 * for calling this function before and CTS-to-self frame is needed.
4115 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004116void ieee80211_ctstoself_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4117 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004118 const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004119 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004120 struct ieee80211_cts *cts);
4121
4122/**
4123 * ieee80211_ctstoself_duration - Get the duration field for a CTS-to-self frame
4124 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004125 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004126 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004127 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004128 *
4129 * If the CTS-to-self is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
4130 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4131 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004132 *
4133 * Return: The duration.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004134 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004135__le16 ieee80211_ctstoself_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4136 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004137 size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004138 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004139
4140/**
4141 * ieee80211_generic_frame_duration - Calculate the duration field for a frame
4142 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004143 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Johannes Bergd13e1412012-06-09 10:31:09 +02004144 * @band: the band to calculate the frame duration on
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004145 * @frame_len: the length of the frame.
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01004146 * @rate: the rate at which the frame is going to be transmitted.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004147 *
4148 * Calculate the duration field of some generic frame, given its
4149 * length and transmission rate (in 100kbps).
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004150 *
4151 * Return: The duration.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004152 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004153__le16 ieee80211_generic_frame_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4154 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Michal Kazior4ee73f32012-04-11 08:47:56 +02004155 enum ieee80211_band band,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004156 size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01004157 struct ieee80211_rate *rate);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004158
4159/**
4160 * ieee80211_get_buffered_bc - accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames
4161 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004162 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004163 *
4164 * Function for accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames. If
4165 * hardware/firmware does not implement buffering of broadcast/multicast
4166 * frames when power saving is used, 802.11 code buffers them in the host
4167 * memory. The low-level driver uses this function to fetch next buffered
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004168 * frame. In most cases, this is used when generating beacon frame.
4169 *
4170 * Return: A pointer to the next buffered skb or NULL if no more buffered
4171 * frames are available.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004172 *
4173 * Note: buffered frames are returned only after DTIM beacon frame was
4174 * generated with ieee80211_beacon_get() and the low-level driver must thus
4175 * call ieee80211_beacon_get() first. ieee80211_get_buffered_bc() returns
4176 * NULL if the previous generated beacon was not DTIM, so the low-level driver
4177 * does not need to check for DTIM beacons separately and should be able to
4178 * use common code for all beacons.
4179 */
4180struct sk_buff *
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004181ieee80211_get_buffered_bc(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004182
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004183/**
Johannes Berg42d98792011-07-07 18:58:01 +02004184 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv - get a TKIP phase 1 key for IV32
4185 *
4186 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32.
4187 *
4188 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4189 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
4190 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
4191 */
4192void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4193 u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
4194
4195/**
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004196 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd2008-03-20 15:06:41 +02004197 *
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004198 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the IV32 taken
4199 * from the given packet.
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd2008-03-20 15:06:41 +02004200 *
4201 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004202 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32 value from that will be encrypted
4203 * with this P1K
4204 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd2008-03-20 15:06:41 +02004205 */
Johannes Berg42d98792011-07-07 18:58:01 +02004206static inline void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4207 struct sk_buff *skb, u16 *p1k)
4208{
4209 struct ieee80211_hdr *hdr = (struct ieee80211_hdr *)skb->data;
4210 const u8 *data = (u8 *)hdr + ieee80211_hdrlen(hdr->frame_control);
4211 u32 iv32 = get_unaligned_le32(&data[4]);
4212
4213 ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(keyconf, iv32, p1k);
4214}
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004215
4216/**
Johannes Berg8bca5d82011-07-13 19:50:34 +02004217 * ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key for RX
4218 *
4219 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32
4220 * and transmitter address.
4221 *
4222 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4223 * @ta: TA that will be used with the key
4224 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
4225 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
4226 */
4227void ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4228 const u8 *ta, u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
4229
4230/**
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004231 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k - get a TKIP phase 2 key
4232 *
4233 * This function computes the TKIP RC4 key for the IV values
4234 * in the packet.
4235 *
4236 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4237 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32/IV16 values from that will be
4238 * encrypted with this key
4239 * @p2k: a buffer to which the key will be written, 16 bytes
4240 */
4241void ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4242 struct sk_buff *skb, u8 *p2k);
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02004243
4244/**
Assaf Krauss5d0d04e2012-08-01 15:12:48 +03004245 * ieee80211_aes_cmac_calculate_k1_k2 - calculate the AES-CMAC sub keys
4246 *
4247 * This function computes the two AES-CMAC sub-keys, based on the
4248 * previously installed master key.
4249 *
4250 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4251 * @k1: a buffer to be filled with the 1st sub-key
4252 * @k2: a buffer to be filled with the 2nd sub-key
4253 */
4254void ieee80211_aes_cmac_calculate_k1_k2(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4255 u8 *k1, u8 *k2);
4256
4257/**
Johannes Berg3ea542d2011-07-07 18:58:00 +02004258 * struct ieee80211_key_seq - key sequence counter
4259 *
4260 * @tkip: TKIP data, containing IV32 and IV16 in host byte order
4261 * @ccmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
4262 * reverse order than in packet)
4263 * @aes_cmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
4264 * reverse order than in packet)
Jouni Malinen8ade5382015-01-24 19:52:09 +02004265 * @aes_gmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
4266 * reverse order than in packet)
Jouni Malinen00b9cfa2015-01-24 19:52:06 +02004267 * @gcmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
4268 * reverse order than in packet)
Johannes Berg3ea542d2011-07-07 18:58:00 +02004269 */
4270struct ieee80211_key_seq {
4271 union {
4272 struct {
4273 u32 iv32;
4274 u16 iv16;
4275 } tkip;
4276 struct {
4277 u8 pn[6];
4278 } ccmp;
4279 struct {
4280 u8 pn[6];
4281 } aes_cmac;
Jouni Malinen00b9cfa2015-01-24 19:52:06 +02004282 struct {
4283 u8 pn[6];
Jouni Malinen8ade5382015-01-24 19:52:09 +02004284 } aes_gmac;
4285 struct {
4286 u8 pn[6];
Jouni Malinen00b9cfa2015-01-24 19:52:06 +02004287 } gcmp;
Johannes Berg3ea542d2011-07-07 18:58:00 +02004288 };
4289};
4290
4291/**
4292 * ieee80211_get_key_tx_seq - get key TX sequence counter
4293 *
4294 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4295 * @seq: buffer to receive the sequence data
4296 *
4297 * This function allows a driver to retrieve the current TX IV/PN
4298 * for the given key. It must not be called if IV generation is
4299 * offloaded to the device.
4300 *
4301 * Note that this function may only be called when no TX processing
4302 * can be done concurrently, for example when queues are stopped
4303 * and the stop has been synchronized.
4304 */
4305void ieee80211_get_key_tx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4306 struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
4307
4308/**
4309 * ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq - get key RX sequence counter
4310 *
4311 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
Jouni Malinen00b9cfa2015-01-24 19:52:06 +02004312 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
Johannes Berg3ea542d2011-07-07 18:58:00 +02004313 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
4314 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
4315 * @seq: buffer to receive the sequence data
4316 *
4317 * This function allows a driver to retrieve the current RX IV/PNs
4318 * for the given key. It must not be called if IV checking is done
4319 * by the device and not by mac80211.
4320 *
4321 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
4322 * can be done concurrently.
4323 */
4324void ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4325 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
4326
4327/**
Johannes Berg27b3eb92013-08-07 20:11:55 +02004328 * ieee80211_set_key_tx_seq - set key TX sequence counter
4329 *
4330 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4331 * @seq: new sequence data
4332 *
4333 * This function allows a driver to set the current TX IV/PNs for the
4334 * given key. This is useful when resuming from WoWLAN sleep and the
4335 * device may have transmitted frames using the PTK, e.g. replies to
4336 * ARP requests.
4337 *
4338 * Note that this function may only be called when no TX processing
4339 * can be done concurrently.
4340 */
4341void ieee80211_set_key_tx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4342 struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
4343
4344/**
4345 * ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq - set key RX sequence counter
4346 *
4347 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
Jouni Malinen00b9cfa2015-01-24 19:52:06 +02004348 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
Johannes Berg27b3eb92013-08-07 20:11:55 +02004349 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
4350 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
4351 * @seq: new sequence data
4352 *
4353 * This function allows a driver to set the current RX IV/PNs for the
4354 * given key. This is useful when resuming from WoWLAN sleep and GTK
4355 * rekey may have been done while suspended. It should not be called
4356 * if IV checking is done by the device and not by mac80211.
4357 *
4358 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
4359 * can be done concurrently.
4360 */
4361void ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4362 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
4363
4364/**
4365 * ieee80211_remove_key - remove the given key
4366 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4367 *
4368 * Remove the given key. If the key was uploaded to the hardware at the
4369 * time this function is called, it is not deleted in the hardware but
4370 * instead assumed to have been removed already.
4371 *
4372 * Note that due to locking considerations this function can (currently)
4373 * only be called during key iteration (ieee80211_iter_keys().)
4374 */
4375void ieee80211_remove_key(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
4376
4377/**
4378 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add - add a GTK key from rekeying during WoWLAN
4379 * @vif: the virtual interface to add the key on
4380 * @keyconf: new key data
4381 *
4382 * When GTK rekeying was done while the system was suspended, (a) new
4383 * key(s) will be available. These will be needed by mac80211 for proper
4384 * RX processing, so this function allows setting them.
4385 *
4386 * The function returns the newly allocated key structure, which will
4387 * have similar contents to the passed key configuration but point to
4388 * mac80211-owned memory. In case of errors, the function returns an
4389 * ERR_PTR(), use IS_ERR() etc.
4390 *
4391 * Note that this function assumes the key isn't added to hardware
4392 * acceleration, so no TX will be done with the key. Since it's a GTK
4393 * on managed (station) networks, this is true anyway. If the driver
4394 * calls this function from the resume callback and subsequently uses
4395 * the return code 1 to reconfigure the device, this key will be part
4396 * of the reconfiguration.
4397 *
4398 * Note that the driver should also call ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq()
4399 * for the new key for each TID to set up sequence counters properly.
4400 *
4401 * IMPORTANT: If this replaces a key that is present in the hardware,
4402 * then it will attempt to remove it during this call. In many cases
4403 * this isn't what you want, so call ieee80211_remove_key() first for
4404 * the key that's being replaced.
4405 */
4406struct ieee80211_key_conf *
4407ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4408 struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
4409
4410/**
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02004411 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify - notify userspace supplicant of rekeying
4412 * @vif: virtual interface the rekeying was done on
4413 * @bssid: The BSSID of the AP, for checking association
4414 * @replay_ctr: the new replay counter after GTK rekeying
4415 * @gfp: allocation flags
4416 */
4417void ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *bssid,
4418 const u8 *replay_ctr, gfp_t gfp);
4419
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd2008-03-20 15:06:41 +02004420/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004421 * ieee80211_wake_queue - wake specific queue
4422 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4423 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
4424 *
4425 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
4426 */
4427void ieee80211_wake_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
4428
4429/**
4430 * ieee80211_stop_queue - stop specific queue
4431 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4432 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
4433 *
4434 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
4435 */
4436void ieee80211_stop_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
4437
4438/**
Tomas Winkler92ab8532008-07-24 21:02:04 +03004439 * ieee80211_queue_stopped - test status of the queue
4440 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4441 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
4442 *
4443 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004444 *
4445 * Return: %true if the queue is stopped. %false otherwise.
Tomas Winkler92ab8532008-07-24 21:02:04 +03004446 */
4447
4448int ieee80211_queue_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
4449
4450/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004451 * ieee80211_stop_queues - stop all queues
4452 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4453 *
4454 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
4455 */
4456void ieee80211_stop_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4457
4458/**
4459 * ieee80211_wake_queues - wake all queues
4460 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4461 *
4462 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
4463 */
4464void ieee80211_wake_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4465
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004466/**
4467 * ieee80211_scan_completed - completed hardware scan
4468 *
4469 * When hardware scan offload is used (i.e. the hw_scan() callback is
4470 * assigned) this function needs to be called by the driver to notify
Johannes Berg8789d452010-08-26 13:30:26 +02004471 * mac80211 that the scan finished. This function can be called from
4472 * any context, including hardirq context.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004473 *
4474 * @hw: the hardware that finished the scan
Johannes Berg2a519312009-02-10 21:25:55 +01004475 * @aborted: set to true if scan was aborted
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004476 */
Johannes Berg2a519312009-02-10 21:25:55 +01004477void ieee80211_scan_completed(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, bool aborted);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004478
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004479/**
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03004480 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results - got results from scheduled scan
4481 *
4482 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function needs to be called by the
4483 * driver whenever there are new scan results available.
4484 *
4485 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
4486 */
4487void ieee80211_sched_scan_results(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4488
4489/**
4490 * ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped - inform that the scheduled scan has stopped
4491 *
4492 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function can be called by
4493 * the driver if it needs to stop the scan to perform another task.
4494 * Usual scenarios are drivers that cannot continue the scheduled scan
4495 * while associating, for instance.
4496 *
4497 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
4498 */
4499void ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4500
4501/**
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004502 * enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags - interface iteration flags
4503 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL: Iterate over all interfaces that have
4504 * been added to the driver; However, note that during hardware
4505 * reconfiguration (after restart_hw) it will iterate over a new
4506 * interface and over all the existing interfaces even if they
4507 * haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
4508 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL: During resume, iterate over all
4509 * interfaces, even if they haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
Arik Nemtsov3384d752015-03-01 09:10:15 +02004510 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE: Iterate only active interfaces (netdev is up).
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004511 */
4512enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags {
4513 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL = 0,
4514 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL = BIT(0),
Arik Nemtsov3384d752015-03-01 09:10:15 +02004515 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE = BIT(1),
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004516};
4517
4518/**
Arik Nemtsov3384d752015-03-01 09:10:15 +02004519 * ieee80211_iterate_interfaces - iterate interfaces
4520 *
4521 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
4522 * hardware and calls the callback for them. This includes active as well as
4523 * inactive interfaces. This function allows the iterator function to sleep.
4524 * Will iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
4525 *
4526 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
4527 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
4528 * @iterator: the iterator function to call
4529 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4530 */
4531void ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
4532 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
4533 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
4534 void *data);
4535
4536/**
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -07004537 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces - iterate active interfaces
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004538 *
4539 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
4540 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004541 * This function allows the iterator function to sleep, when the iterator
4542 * function is atomic @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic can
4543 * be used.
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004544 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004545 *
4546 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004547 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004548 * @iterator: the iterator function to call
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004549 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4550 */
Arik Nemtsov3384d752015-03-01 09:10:15 +02004551static inline void
4552ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
4553 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
4554 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
4555 void *data)
4556{
4557 ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(hw,
4558 iter_flags | IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE,
4559 iterator, data);
4560}
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004561
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004562/**
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004563 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic - iterate active interfaces
4564 *
4565 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
4566 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
4567 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
4568 * if that is not desired, use @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces instead.
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004569 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004570 *
4571 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004572 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004573 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
4574 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4575 */
4576void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004577 u32 iter_flags,
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004578 void (*iterator)(void *data,
4579 u8 *mac,
4580 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
4581 void *data);
4582
4583/**
Johannes Bergc7c71062013-08-21 22:07:20 +02004584 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl - iterate active interfaces
4585 *
4586 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
4587 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
4588 * This version can only be used while holding the RTNL.
4589 *
4590 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
4591 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
4592 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
4593 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4594 */
4595void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4596 u32 iter_flags,
4597 void (*iterator)(void *data,
4598 u8 *mac,
4599 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
4600 void *data);
4601
4602/**
Arik Nemtsov0fc1e042014-10-22 12:30:59 +03004603 * ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic - iterate stations
4604 *
4605 * This function iterates over all stations associated with a given
4606 * hardware that are currently uploaded to the driver and calls the callback
4607 * function for them.
4608 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
4609 *
4610 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
4611 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
4612 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4613 */
4614void ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4615 void (*iterator)(void *data,
4616 struct ieee80211_sta *sta),
4617 void *data);
4618/**
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -04004619 * ieee80211_queue_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
4620 *
4621 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to add work onto the mac80211 workqueue.
4622 * This helper ensures drivers are not queueing work when they should not be.
4623 *
4624 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
4625 * @work: the work we want to add onto the mac80211 workqueue
4626 */
4627void ieee80211_queue_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct work_struct *work);
4628
4629/**
4630 * ieee80211_queue_delayed_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
4631 *
4632 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to queue delayed work onto the mac80211
4633 * workqueue.
4634 *
4635 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
4636 * @dwork: delayable work to queue onto the mac80211 workqueue
4637 * @delay: number of jiffies to wait before queueing
4638 */
4639void ieee80211_queue_delayed_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4640 struct delayed_work *dwork,
4641 unsigned long delay);
4642
4643/**
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004644 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session - Start a tx Block Ack session.
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01004645 * @sta: the station for which to start a BA session
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004646 * @tid: the TID to BA on.
Sujith Manoharanbd2ce6e2010-12-15 07:47:10 +05304647 * @timeout: session timeout value (in TUs)
Randy Dunlapea2d8b52008-10-27 09:47:03 -07004648 *
4649 * Return: success if addBA request was sent, failure otherwise
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004650 *
4651 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
4652 * the need to start aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
4653 * will be managed by the mac80211.
4654 */
Sujith Manoharanbd2ce6e2010-12-15 07:47:10 +05304655int ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid,
4656 u16 timeout);
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004657
4658/**
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004659 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to aggregate.
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004660 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004661 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
4662 * @tid: the TID to BA on.
4663 *
4664 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
Johannes Berg5d22c892010-06-10 10:21:40 +02004665 * finished with preparations for the BA session. It can be called
4666 * from any context.
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004667 */
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01004668void ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004669 u16 tid);
4670
4671/**
4672 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session - Stop a Block Ack session.
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01004673 * @sta: the station whose BA session to stop
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004674 * @tid: the TID to stop BA.
Randy Dunlapea2d8b52008-10-27 09:47:03 -07004675 *
Johannes Berg6a8579d2010-05-27 14:41:07 +02004676 * Return: negative error if the TID is invalid, or no aggregation active
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004677 *
4678 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
4679 * the need to stop aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
4680 * will be managed by the mac80211.
4681 */
Johannes Berg6a8579d2010-05-27 14:41:07 +02004682int ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid);
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004683
4684/**
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004685 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to stop aggregate.
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004686 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004687 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
4688 * @tid: the desired TID to BA on.
4689 *
4690 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
Johannes Berg5d22c892010-06-10 10:21:40 +02004691 * finished with preparations for the BA session tear down. It
4692 * can be called from any context.
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004693 */
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01004694void ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004695 u16 tid);
4696
Mohamed Abbas84363e62008-04-04 16:59:58 -07004697/**
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02004698 * ieee80211_find_sta - find a station
4699 *
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004700 * @vif: virtual interface to look for station on
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02004701 * @addr: station's address
4702 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004703 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
4704 *
4705 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02004706 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
4707 */
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004708struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02004709 const u8 *addr);
4710
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02004711/**
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07004712 * ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr - find a station on hardware
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004713 *
4714 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07004715 * @addr: remote station's address
4716 * @localaddr: local address (vif->sdata->vif.addr). Use NULL for 'any'.
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004717 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004718 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
4719 *
4720 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004721 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
4722 *
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07004723 * NOTE: You may pass NULL for localaddr, but then you will just get
4724 * the first STA that matches the remote address 'addr'.
4725 * We can have multiple STA associated with multiple
4726 * logical stations (e.g. consider a station connecting to another
4727 * BSSID on the same AP hardware without disconnecting first).
4728 * In this case, the result of this method with localaddr NULL
4729 * is not reliable.
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004730 *
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07004731 * DO NOT USE THIS FUNCTION with localaddr NULL if at all possible.
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004732 */
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07004733struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4734 const u8 *addr,
4735 const u8 *localaddr);
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004736
4737/**
Johannes Bergaf818582009-11-06 11:35:50 +01004738 * ieee80211_sta_block_awake - block station from waking up
4739 * @hw: the hardware
4740 * @pubsta: the station
4741 * @block: whether to block or unblock
4742 *
4743 * Some devices require that all frames that are on the queues
4744 * for a specific station that went to sleep are flushed before
4745 * a poll response or frames after the station woke up can be
4746 * delivered to that it. Note that such frames must be rejected
4747 * by the driver as filtered, with the appropriate status flag.
4748 *
4749 * This function allows implementing this mode in a race-free
4750 * manner.
4751 *
4752 * To do this, a driver must keep track of the number of frames
4753 * still enqueued for a specific station. If this number is not
4754 * zero when the station goes to sleep, the driver must call
4755 * this function to force mac80211 to consider the station to
4756 * be asleep regardless of the station's actual state. Once the
4757 * number of outstanding frames reaches zero, the driver must
4758 * call this function again to unblock the station. That will
4759 * cause mac80211 to be able to send ps-poll responses, and if
4760 * the station queried in the meantime then frames will also
4761 * be sent out as a result of this. Additionally, the driver
4762 * will be notified that the station woke up some time after
4763 * it is unblocked, regardless of whether the station actually
4764 * woke up while blocked or not.
4765 */
4766void ieee80211_sta_block_awake(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4767 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, bool block);
4768
4769/**
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02004770 * ieee80211_sta_eosp - notify mac80211 about end of SP
4771 * @pubsta: the station
4772 *
4773 * When a device transmits frames in a way that it can't tell
4774 * mac80211 in the TX status about the EOSP, it must clear the
4775 * %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP bit and call this function instead.
4776 * This applies for PS-Poll as well as uAPSD.
4777 *
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01004778 * Note that just like with _tx_status() and _rx() drivers must
4779 * not mix calls to irqsafe/non-irqsafe versions, this function
4780 * must not be mixed with those either. Use the all irqsafe, or
4781 * all non-irqsafe, don't mix!
4782 *
4783 * NB: the _irqsafe version of this function doesn't exist, no
4784 * driver needs it right now. Don't call this function if
4785 * you'd need the _irqsafe version, look at the git history
4786 * and restore the _irqsafe version!
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02004787 */
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01004788void ieee80211_sta_eosp(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta);
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02004789
4790/**
Johannes Berg830af022011-07-05 16:35:39 +02004791 * ieee80211_iter_keys - iterate keys programmed into the device
4792 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4793 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
4794 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
4795 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
4796 *
4797 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
4798 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
4799 * the device. This is intended for use in WoWLAN if the device
4800 * needs reprogramming of the keys during suspend. Note that due
4801 * to locking reasons, it is also only safe to call this at few
4802 * spots since it must hold the RTNL and be able to sleep.
Johannes Bergf850e002011-07-13 19:50:53 +02004803 *
4804 * The order in which the keys are iterated matches the order
4805 * in which they were originally installed and handed to the
4806 * set_key callback.
Johannes Berg830af022011-07-05 16:35:39 +02004807 */
4808void ieee80211_iter_keys(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4809 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4810 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4811 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4812 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4813 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
4814 void *data),
4815 void *iter_data);
4816
4817/**
Johannes Berg3448c002012-09-11 17:57:42 +02004818 * ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic - iterate channel contexts
4819 * @hw: pointre obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4820 * @iter: iterator function
4821 * @iter_data: data passed to iterator function
4822 *
4823 * Iterate all active channel contexts. This function is atomic and
4824 * doesn't acquire any locks internally that might be held in other
4825 * places while calling into the driver.
4826 *
4827 * The iterator will not find a context that's being added (during
4828 * the driver callback to add it) but will find it while it's being
4829 * removed.
Johannes Berg8a61af62012-12-13 17:42:30 +01004830 *
4831 * Note that during hardware restart, all contexts that existed
4832 * before the restart are considered already present so will be
4833 * found while iterating, whether they've been re-added already
4834 * or not.
Johannes Berg3448c002012-09-11 17:57:42 +02004835 */
4836void ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic(
4837 struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4838 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4839 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *chanctx_conf,
4840 void *data),
4841 void *iter_data);
4842
4843/**
Juuso Oikarinena619a4c2010-11-11 08:50:18 +02004844 * ieee80211_ap_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
4845 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4846 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4847 *
4848 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
4849 * hardware. The template is filled with bssid, ssid and supported rate
4850 * information. This function must only be called from within the
4851 * .bss_info_changed callback function and only in managed mode. The function
4852 * is only useful when the interface is associated, otherwise it will return
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004853 * %NULL.
4854 *
4855 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
Juuso Oikarinena619a4c2010-11-11 08:50:18 +02004856 */
4857struct sk_buff *ieee80211_ap_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4858 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4859
4860/**
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02004861 * ieee80211_beacon_loss - inform hardware does not receive beacons
4862 *
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004863 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02004864 *
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01004865 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER and
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02004866 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set, the driver needs to inform whenever the
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02004867 * hardware is not receiving beacons with this function.
4868 */
4869void ieee80211_beacon_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004870
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02004871/**
4872 * ieee80211_connection_loss - inform hardware has lost connection to the AP
4873 *
4874 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4875 *
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01004876 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER, and
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02004877 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS and %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR are set, the driver
4878 * needs to inform if the connection to the AP has been lost.
Johannes Berg682bd382013-01-29 13:13:50 +01004879 * The function may also be called if the connection needs to be terminated
4880 * for some other reason, even if %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR isn't set.
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02004881 *
4882 * This function will cause immediate change to disassociated state,
4883 * without connection recovery attempts.
4884 */
4885void ieee80211_connection_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4886
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02004887/**
Johannes Berg95acac62011-07-12 12:30:59 +02004888 * ieee80211_resume_disconnect - disconnect from AP after resume
4889 *
4890 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4891 *
4892 * Instructs mac80211 to disconnect from the AP after resume.
4893 * Drivers can use this after WoWLAN if they know that the
4894 * connection cannot be kept up, for example because keys were
4895 * used while the device was asleep but the replay counters or
4896 * similar cannot be retrieved from the device during resume.
4897 *
4898 * Note that due to implementation issues, if the driver uses
4899 * the reconfiguration functionality during resume the interface
4900 * will still be added as associated first during resume and then
4901 * disconnect normally later.
4902 *
4903 * This function can only be called from the resume callback and
4904 * the driver must not be holding any of its own locks while it
4905 * calls this function, or at least not any locks it needs in the
4906 * key configuration paths (if it supports HW crypto).
4907 */
4908void ieee80211_resume_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4909
4910/**
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02004911 * ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify - inform a configured connection quality monitoring
4912 * rssi threshold triggered
4913 *
4914 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4915 * @rssi_event: the RSSI trigger event type
4916 * @gfp: context flags
4917 *
Johannes Bergea086352012-01-19 09:29:58 +01004918 * When the %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI is set, and a connection quality
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02004919 * monitoring is configured with an rssi threshold, the driver will inform
4920 * whenever the rssi level reaches the threshold.
4921 */
4922void ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4923 enum nl80211_cqm_rssi_threshold_event rssi_event,
4924 gfp_t gfp);
4925
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02004926/**
Johannes Berg98f03342014-11-26 12:42:02 +01004927 * ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify - inform CQM of beacon loss
4928 *
4929 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4930 * @gfp: context flags
4931 */
4932void ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, gfp_t gfp);
4933
4934/**
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +01004935 * ieee80211_radar_detected - inform that a radar was detected
4936 *
4937 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4938 */
4939void ieee80211_radar_detected(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4940
4941/**
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02004942 * ieee80211_chswitch_done - Complete channel switch process
4943 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4944 * @success: make the channel switch successful or not
4945 *
4946 * Complete the channel switch post-process: set the new operational channel
4947 * and wake up the suspended queues.
4948 */
4949void ieee80211_chswitch_done(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool success);
4950
Johannes Bergd1f5b7a2010-08-05 17:05:55 +02004951/**
4952 * ieee80211_request_smps - request SM PS transition
4953 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Johannes Berg633dd1e2010-08-18 15:01:23 +02004954 * @smps_mode: new SM PS mode
Johannes Bergd1f5b7a2010-08-05 17:05:55 +02004955 *
4956 * This allows the driver to request an SM PS transition in managed
4957 * mode. This is useful when the driver has more information than
4958 * the stack about possible interference, for example by bluetooth.
4959 */
4960void ieee80211_request_smps(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4961 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode);
4962
Johannes Berge31b8212010-10-05 19:39:30 +02004963/**
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01004964 * ieee80211_ready_on_channel - notification of remain-on-channel start
4965 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4966 */
4967void ieee80211_ready_on_channel(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4968
4969/**
4970 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired - remain_on_channel duration expired
4971 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4972 */
4973void ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4974
Shahar Levif41ccd72011-05-22 16:10:21 +03004975/**
4976 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session - callback to stop existing BA sessions
4977 *
4978 * in order not to harm the system performance and user experience, the device
4979 * may request not to allow any rx ba session and tear down existing rx ba
4980 * sessions based on system constraints such as periodic BT activity that needs
4981 * to limit wlan activity (eg.sco or a2dp)."
4982 * in such cases, the intention is to limit the duration of the rx ppdu and
4983 * therefore prevent the peer device to use a-mpdu aggregation.
4984 *
4985 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4986 * @ba_rx_bitmap: Bit map of open rx ba per tid
4987 * @addr: & to bssid mac address
4988 */
4989void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ba_rx_bitmap,
4990 const u8 *addr);
4991
Felix Fietkau8c771242011-08-20 15:53:55 +02004992/**
4993 * ieee80211_send_bar - send a BlockAckReq frame
4994 *
4995 * can be used to flush pending frames from the peer's aggregation reorder
4996 * buffer.
4997 *
4998 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4999 * @ra: the peer's destination address
5000 * @tid: the TID of the aggregation session
5001 * @ssn: the new starting sequence number for the receiver
5002 */
5003void ieee80211_send_bar(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 *ra, u16 tid, u16 ssn);
5004
Michal Kazior08cf42e2014-07-16 12:12:15 +02005005/**
5006 * ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl - start a Rx BA session
5007 *
5008 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
5009 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
5010 * reordering.
5011 *
5012 * Create structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
5013 * when they complete AddBa negotiation.
5014 *
5015 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5016 * @addr: station mac address
5017 * @tid: the rx tid
5018 */
5019void ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5020 const u8 *addr, u16 tid);
5021
5022/**
5023 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl - stop a Rx BA session
5024 *
5025 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
5026 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
5027 * reordering.
5028 *
5029 * Destroy structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
5030 * when they complete DelBa negotiation.
5031 *
5032 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5033 * @addr: station mac address
5034 * @tid: the rx tid
5035 */
5036void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5037 const u8 *addr, u16 tid);
5038
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005039/* Rate control API */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005040
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005041/**
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005042 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control - rate control information for/from RC algo
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005043 *
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005044 * @hw: The hardware the algorithm is invoked for.
5045 * @sband: The band this frame is being transmitted on.
5046 * @bss_conf: the current BSS configuration
Simon Wunderlichf44d4eb2012-03-07 21:31:13 +01005047 * @skb: the skb that will be transmitted, the control information in it needs
5048 * to be filled in
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005049 * @reported_rate: The rate control algorithm can fill this in to indicate
5050 * which rate should be reported to userspace as the current rate and
5051 * used for rate calculations in the mesh network.
5052 * @rts: whether RTS will be used for this frame because it is longer than the
5053 * RTS threshold
5054 * @short_preamble: whether mac80211 will request short-preamble transmission
5055 * if the selected rate supports it
Simon Wunderlichf44d4eb2012-03-07 21:31:13 +01005056 * @max_rate_idx: user-requested maximum (legacy) rate
Jouni Malinen37eb0b12010-01-06 13:09:08 +02005057 * (deprecated; this will be removed once drivers get updated to use
5058 * rate_idx_mask)
Simon Wunderlichf44d4eb2012-03-07 21:31:13 +01005059 * @rate_idx_mask: user-requested (legacy) rate mask
Felix Fietkau2ffbe6d2013-04-16 13:38:42 +02005060 * @rate_idx_mcs_mask: user-requested MCS rate mask (NULL if not in use)
Felix Fietkau8f0729b2010-11-11 15:07:23 +01005061 * @bss: whether this frame is sent out in AP or IBSS mode
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005062 */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005063struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control {
5064 struct ieee80211_hw *hw;
5065 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband;
5066 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *bss_conf;
5067 struct sk_buff *skb;
5068 struct ieee80211_tx_rate reported_rate;
5069 bool rts, short_preamble;
5070 u8 max_rate_idx;
Jouni Malinen37eb0b12010-01-06 13:09:08 +02005071 u32 rate_idx_mask;
Felix Fietkau2ffbe6d2013-04-16 13:38:42 +02005072 u8 *rate_idx_mcs_mask;
Felix Fietkau8f0729b2010-11-11 15:07:23 +01005073 bool bss;
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005074};
5075
5076struct rate_control_ops {
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005077 const char *name;
5078 void *(*alloc)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct dentry *debugfsdir);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005079 void (*free)(void *priv);
5080
5081 void *(*alloc_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, gfp_t gfp);
5082 void (*rate_init)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
Simon Wunderlich3de805c2013-07-08 16:55:50 +02005083 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005084 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta);
Sujith81cb7622009-02-12 11:38:37 +05305085 void (*rate_update)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
Simon Wunderlich3de805c2013-07-08 16:55:50 +02005086 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
Johannes Berg64f68e52012-03-28 10:58:37 +02005087 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5088 u32 changed);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005089 void (*free_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5090 void *priv_sta);
5091
Felix Fietkauf6845652014-11-19 20:08:08 +01005092 void (*tx_status_noskb)(void *priv,
5093 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5094 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5095 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005096 void (*tx_status)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5097 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5098 struct sk_buff *skb);
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005099 void (*get_rate)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5100 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005101
5102 void (*add_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta,
5103 struct dentry *dir);
5104 void (*remove_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta);
Antonio Quartullicca674d2014-05-19 21:53:20 +02005105
5106 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(void *priv_sta);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005107};
5108
5109static inline int rate_supported(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5110 enum ieee80211_band band,
5111 int index)
5112{
5113 return (sta == NULL || sta->supp_rates[band] & BIT(index));
5114}
5115
Luis R. Rodriguez4c6d4f52009-07-16 10:05:41 -07005116/**
5117 * rate_control_send_low - helper for drivers for management/no-ack frames
5118 *
5119 * Rate control algorithms that agree to use the lowest rate to
5120 * send management frames and NO_ACK data with the respective hw
5121 * retries should use this in the beginning of their mac80211 get_rate
5122 * callback. If true is returned the rate control can simply return.
5123 * If false is returned we guarantee that sta and sta and priv_sta is
5124 * not null.
5125 *
5126 * Rate control algorithms wishing to do more intelligent selection of
5127 * rate for multicast/broadcast frames may choose to not use this.
5128 *
5129 * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination. Note
5130 * that this may be null.
5131 * @priv_sta: private rate control structure. This may be null.
5132 * @txrc: rate control information we sholud populate for mac80211.
5133 */
5134bool rate_control_send_low(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5135 void *priv_sta,
5136 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc);
5137
5138
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005139static inline s8
5140rate_lowest_index(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5141 struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
5142{
5143 int i;
5144
5145 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
5146 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
5147 return i;
5148
5149 /* warn when we cannot find a rate. */
Johannes Berg54d50262011-11-04 18:07:43 +01005150 WARN_ON_ONCE(1);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005151
Johannes Berg54d50262011-11-04 18:07:43 +01005152 /* and return 0 (the lowest index) */
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005153 return 0;
5154}
5155
Luis R. Rodriguezb770b432009-07-16 10:15:09 -07005156static inline
5157bool rate_usable_index_exists(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5158 struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
5159{
5160 unsigned int i;
5161
5162 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
5163 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
5164 return true;
5165 return false;
5166}
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005167
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02005168/**
5169 * rate_control_set_rates - pass the sta rate selection to mac80211/driver
5170 *
5171 * When not doing a rate control probe to test rates, rate control should pass
5172 * its rate selection to mac80211. If the driver supports receiving a station
5173 * rate table, it will use it to ensure that frames are always sent based on
5174 * the most recent rate control module decision.
5175 *
5176 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5177 * @pubsta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination.
5178 * @rates: new tx rate set to be used for this station.
5179 */
5180int rate_control_set_rates(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5181 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
5182 struct ieee80211_sta_rates *rates);
5183
Johannes Berg631ad702014-01-20 23:29:34 +01005184int ieee80211_rate_control_register(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
5185void ieee80211_rate_control_unregister(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005186
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005187static inline bool
5188conf_is_ht20(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5189{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01005190 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005191}
5192
5193static inline bool
5194conf_is_ht40_minus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5195{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01005196 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
5197 conf->chandef.center_freq1 < conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005198}
5199
5200static inline bool
5201conf_is_ht40_plus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5202{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01005203 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
5204 conf->chandef.center_freq1 > conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005205}
5206
5207static inline bool
5208conf_is_ht40(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5209{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01005210 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005211}
5212
5213static inline bool
5214conf_is_ht(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5215{
Rostislav Lisovy041f6072014-04-02 15:31:55 +02005216 return (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_5) &&
5217 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_10) &&
5218 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20_NOHT);
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005219}
5220
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02005221static inline enum nl80211_iftype
5222ieee80211_iftype_p2p(enum nl80211_iftype type, bool p2p)
5223{
5224 if (p2p) {
5225 switch (type) {
5226 case NL80211_IFTYPE_STATION:
5227 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_CLIENT;
5228 case NL80211_IFTYPE_AP:
5229 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_GO;
5230 default:
5231 break;
5232 }
5233 }
5234 return type;
5235}
5236
5237static inline enum nl80211_iftype
5238ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
5239{
5240 return ieee80211_iftype_p2p(vif->type, vif->p2p);
5241}
5242
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -07005243void ieee80211_enable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5244 int rssi_min_thold,
5245 int rssi_max_thold);
5246
5247void ieee80211_disable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Arik Nemtsov768db342011-09-28 14:12:51 +03005248
Wey-Yi Guy0d8a0a12012-04-20 11:57:00 -07005249/**
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01005250 * ieee80211_ave_rssi - report the average RSSI for the specified interface
Wey-Yi Guy0d8a0a12012-04-20 11:57:00 -07005251 *
5252 * @vif: the specified virtual interface
5253 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01005254 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid.
5255 *
5256 * Return: The average RSSI value for the requested interface, or 0 if not
5257 * applicable.
Wey-Yi Guy0d8a0a12012-04-20 11:57:00 -07005258 */
Wey-Yi Guy1dae27f2012-04-13 12:02:57 -07005259int ieee80211_ave_rssi(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5260
Johannes Bergcd8f7cb2013-01-22 12:34:29 +01005261/**
5262 * ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup - report WoWLAN wakeup
5263 * @vif: virtual interface
5264 * @wakeup: wakeup reason(s)
5265 * @gfp: allocation flags
5266 *
5267 * See cfg80211_report_wowlan_wakeup().
5268 */
5269void ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5270 struct cfg80211_wowlan_wakeup *wakeup,
5271 gfp_t gfp);
5272
Felix Fietkau06be6b12013-10-14 18:01:00 +02005273/**
5274 * ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb - prepare an 802.11 skb for transmission
5275 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5276 * @vif: virtual interface
5277 * @skb: frame to be sent from within the driver
5278 * @band: the band to transmit on
5279 * @sta: optional pointer to get the station to send the frame to
5280 *
5281 * Note: must be called under RCU lock
5282 */
5283bool ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5284 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct sk_buff *skb,
5285 int band, struct ieee80211_sta **sta);
5286
Felix Fietkaua7022e62013-12-16 21:49:14 +01005287/**
5288 * struct ieee80211_noa_data - holds temporary data for tracking P2P NoA state
5289 *
5290 * @next_tsf: TSF timestamp of the next absent state change
5291 * @has_next_tsf: next absent state change event pending
5292 *
5293 * @absent: descriptor bitmask, set if GO is currently absent
5294 *
5295 * private:
5296 *
5297 * @count: count fields from the NoA descriptors
5298 * @desc: adjusted data from the NoA
5299 */
5300struct ieee80211_noa_data {
5301 u32 next_tsf;
5302 bool has_next_tsf;
5303
5304 u8 absent;
5305
5306 u8 count[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
5307 struct {
5308 u32 start;
5309 u32 duration;
5310 u32 interval;
5311 } desc[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
5312};
5313
5314/**
5315 * ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa - initialize NoA tracking data from P2P IE
5316 *
5317 * @attr: P2P NoA IE
5318 * @data: NoA tracking data
5319 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
5320 *
5321 * Return: number of successfully parsed descriptors
5322 */
5323int ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa(const struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr *attr,
5324 struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
5325
5326/**
5327 * ieee80211_update_p2p_noa - get next pending P2P GO absent state change
5328 *
5329 * @data: NoA tracking data
5330 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
5331 */
5332void ieee80211_update_p2p_noa(struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
5333
Arik Nemtsovc887f0d32014-06-11 17:18:25 +03005334/**
5335 * ieee80211_tdls_oper - request userspace to perform a TDLS operation
5336 * @vif: virtual interface
5337 * @peer: the peer's destination address
5338 * @oper: the requested TDLS operation
5339 * @reason_code: reason code for the operation, valid for TDLS teardown
5340 * @gfp: allocation flags
5341 *
5342 * See cfg80211_tdls_oper_request().
5343 */
5344void ieee80211_tdls_oper_request(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *peer,
5345 enum nl80211_tdls_operation oper,
5346 u16 reason_code, gfp_t gfp);
Andrei Otcheretianskia7f3a762014-10-22 15:22:49 +03005347
5348/**
Liad Kaufmanb6da9112014-11-19 13:47:38 +02005349 * ieee80211_reserve_tid - request to reserve a specific TID
5350 *
5351 * There is sometimes a need (such as in TDLS) for blocking the driver from
5352 * using a specific TID so that the FW can use it for certain operations such
5353 * as sending PTI requests. To make sure that the driver doesn't use that TID,
5354 * this function must be called as it flushes out packets on this TID and marks
5355 * it as blocked, so that any transmit for the station on this TID will be
5356 * redirected to the alternative TID in the same AC.
5357 *
5358 * Note that this function blocks and may call back into the driver, so it
5359 * should be called without driver locks held. Also note this function should
5360 * only be called from the driver's @sta_state callback.
5361 *
5362 * @sta: the station to reserve the TID for
5363 * @tid: the TID to reserve
5364 *
5365 * Returns: 0 on success, else on failure
5366 */
5367int ieee80211_reserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
5368
5369/**
5370 * ieee80211_unreserve_tid - request to unreserve a specific TID
5371 *
5372 * Once there is no longer any need for reserving a certain TID, this function
5373 * should be called, and no longer will packets have their TID modified for
5374 * preventing use of this TID in the driver.
5375 *
5376 * Note that this function blocks and acquires a lock, so it should be called
5377 * without driver locks held. Also note this function should only be called
5378 * from the driver's @sta_state callback.
5379 *
5380 * @sta: the station
5381 * @tid: the TID to unreserve
5382 */
5383void ieee80211_unreserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
5384
5385/**
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01005386 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue
5387 *
5388 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5389 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
5390 *
5391 * Returns the skb if successful, %NULL if no frame was available.
5392 */
5393struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5394 struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07005395#endif /* MAC80211_H */